Learn Power Builder 9

‫ﺗﻌﻠﻢ‬

‫‪Power Builder 9.0‬‬

‫ﺑﻘﻠﻢ‪ :‬ﻣﺤﻤﺪ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺮﻱ‬

‫ﺗﻌﻠﻢّ‬ ‫‪POWER BUILDER 9.0‬‬

‫ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻭﺗﻨﻔﻴﺬ ﻭﺇﺧﺮﺍﺝ‬ ‫ﻣﺤﻤﺪ ﻗﺎﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺮﻱ‬ ‫‪U‬‬

‫‪1‬‬

‫‪[email protected]‬‬ ‫‪U‬‬

‫ﺗﻌﻠﻢ‬



‫ﺍﻟﻔﺼﻞ ﺍﻷﻭﻝ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺆﻟﻒ‬ ‫ﺇﻫﺪﺍء‬ ‫ﻟﻤﺤﺔ ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺨﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﻣﻘﺪﻣﻪ‬

‫ﺍﻟﻔﺼﻞ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﻧﻲ‪ :‬ﻭﺍﺟﻪ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﺍﻟـ ‪PB 9.0‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻮﺍﺟﻬﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ ‪Main Interface‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﺷﺠﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﺋﻨﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﻨﺴﺦ ﻭﺍﻟﻘﺺ‬ ‫ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺎﻋﺪﺓ‬

‫‪............................................‬‬ ‫‪............................................‬‬ ‫‪............................................‬‬ ‫‪............................................‬‬

‫‪............................................‬‬ ‫‪............................................‬‬ ‫‪............................................‬‬ ‫‪............................................‬‬ ‫‪............................................‬‬

‫ﺍﻟﻔﺼﻞ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﻟﺚ‪ :‬ﺍﻟﻜﺎﺋﻨﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣﺔ ‪Objects‬‬ ‫‪............................................‬‬ ‫ﻓﻀﺎء ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻞ ‪Workspace‬‬ ‫‪............................................‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ‪Target‬‬ ‫ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻖ ‪Application‬‬ ‫ﻗﻮﺍﻟﺐ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻖ ‪Template Application‬‬ ‫ﻗﻮﺍﻟﺐ ﻣﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ‪Existing Application‬‬

‫ﺍﻟﻜﺎﺋﻨﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ‪PB Object‬‬

‫ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ‪Window‬‬ ‫ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪Menu‬‬ ‫ﻫﻴﻜﻞ ‪Structure‬‬ ‫ﺩﺍﻟﺔ ‪Function‬‬ ‫ﻛﺎﺋﻨﺎﺕ ﻣﺨﺼﺼﺔ ‪Custom Class‬‬

‫ﻧﻮﺍﻓﺬ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ‪Data Window‬‬ ‫ﻧﻤﻮﺫﺝ ﺣﺮ ‪Free Form‬‬ ‫ﺷﺒﻜﺔ ‪Grid‬‬ ‫ﺟﺪﻭﻟﻲ ‪Tabular‬‬ ‫ﻣﻠﺼﻘﺎﺕ ‪Label‬‬ ‫ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ ‪Group‬‬ ‫ﺗﻘﺎﻁﻊ ‪Crosstab‬‬ ‫ﺗﺠﻤﻴﻊ ‪Composite‬‬ ‫ﺃﻋﻤﺪ ﺟﺮﻳﺪﺓ ‪N-UP‬‬ ‫ﺭﺳﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﻴﺔ ‪Graph‬‬

‫ﻗﺎﻋﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ‪Database‬‬

‫ﺭﺳﺎﻡ ﻗﺎﻋﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ‪Database Painter‬‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﻌﻼﻡ ‪Query‬‬ ‫ﺃﻧﺎﺑﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ‪Data Pipeline‬‬

‫ﻣﺸﺮﻭﻉ ‪Project‬‬

‫ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﺳﺮﻳﻊ ‪Application Wizard‬‬ ‫ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻖ ‪Application‬‬

‫ﺃﺩﻭﺍﺕ ‪Tool‬‬

‫ﻣﺴﺘﻜﺸﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺘﺒﺎﺕ ‪Library Painter‬‬

‫ﻣﺤﺮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ‪File Editor‬‬ ‫ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﻧﺎﻓﺬﺓ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ‪Data window Syntax‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬

‫‪............................................‬‬ ‫‪............................................‬‬ ‫‪............................................‬‬ ‫‪............................................‬‬ ‫‪............................................‬‬ ‫‪............................................‬‬ ‫‪............................................‬‬ ‫‪............................................‬‬ ‫‪............................................‬‬ ‫‪............................................‬‬ ‫‪............................................‬‬ ‫‪............................................‬‬ ‫‪............................................‬‬ ‫‪............................................‬‬ ‫‪............................................‬‬ ‫‪............................................‬‬ ‫‪............................................‬‬ ‫‪............................................‬‬ ‫‪............................................‬‬ ‫‪............................................‬‬ ‫‪............................................‬‬ ‫‪............................................‬‬ ‫‪............................................‬‬ ‫‪............................................‬‬ ‫‪............................................‬‬ ‫‪............................................‬‬ ‫‪............................................‬‬ ‫‪............................................‬‬ ‫‪............................................‬‬ ‫‪............................................‬‬

‫ﺗﻌﻠﻢ‬



‫ﺍﻟﻔﺼﻞ ﺍﻟﺮﺍﺑﻊ‪ :‬ﻛﺘﺎﺑﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﻮﺩ‬

‫ﺇﻧﺸﺎء ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻐﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻑ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻧﻮﺍﻋﻬﺎ‬ ‫ﺍﻷﻭﺍﻣﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣﺔ ‪Statements‬‬ ‫ﺇﻧﺸﺎء ﺍﻟﺪﻭﺍﻝ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺧﻠﻴﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﺨﺎﺭﺟﻴﺔ ‪Function‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻔﺼﻞ ﺍﳋﺎﻣﺲ‬ ‫ﻛﻴﻒ ﺗﺒﻨﻲ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ‪PB 9.0‬‬

‫ﺇﻧﺸﺎء ‪Workspace‬‬ ‫ﺇﻧﺸﺎء ‪Target‬‬ ‫ﺇﻧﺸﺎء ‪Application‬‬ ‫ﺇﻧﺸﺎء ‪Library‬‬ ‫ﺇﻧﺸﺎء ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﻣﻊ ﻗﺎﻋﺪﺓ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﻣﺎ ﻫﻮ ﺍﻟﻤﻘﺼﻮﺩ ﺑﺎﻟـ ‪Transaction Object‬‬ ‫ﺇﻧﺸﺎء ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ‪MDI‬‬ ‫ﺇﻧﺸﺎء ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪Menu‬‬

‫ﺍﻟﻔﺼﻞ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺩﺱ‬ ‫ﻣﺸﺎﺭﻳﻊ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﻭﺧﺒﺮﺍﺕ ﺷﺨﺼﻴﺔ‬

‫‪3‬‬

‫‪............................................‬‬ ‫‪............................................‬‬ ‫‪............................................‬‬

‫‪............................................‬‬ ‫‪............................................‬‬ ‫‪............................................‬‬ ‫‪............................................‬‬ ‫‪............................................‬‬ ‫‪............................................‬‬ ‫‪............................................‬‬ ‫‪............................................‬‬ ‫‪............................................‬‬ ‫‪............................................‬‬ ‫‪............................................‬‬

‫ﺗﻌﻠﻢ‬


‫ﺍﻟﻤﺆﻟﻒ‬ ‫ﺇﻫﺪﺍء‬

‫ﺍﻟﻔﺼﻞ ﺍﻷﻭﻝ )ﲤﻬﻴﺪ(‬ ‫)‪(1-1‬‬ ‫)‬

‫‪( 1- 2‬‬

‫ﻟﻤﺤﺔ ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺨﻴﺔ )‪(1-3‬‬ ‫ﻣﻘﺪﻣﻪ‬

‫‪4‬‬


‫)‪(1-4‬‬

‫ﺗﻌﻠﻢ‬


‫)‪ (1- 1‬ﺍﻟﻤﺆﻟﻒ‪:‬‬


‫ﻣﺤﻤﺪ ﻗﺎﺳﻢ ﻣﺤﻤﺪ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺮﻱ‬ ‫ﻭﻟﺪﺕ ﺑﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ ‪1977‬ﻡ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺴﻌﻮﺩﻳﺔ‬ ‫ﺑﻜﺎﻟﻮﺭﻳﻮﺱ ﻋﻠﻢ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﺳﺐ ﺍﻵﻟﻲ‬ ‫ﻣﺒﺮﻣﺞ ﻭﻣﺤﻠﻞ ﻧﻈﻢ ﻭﻣﺪﻳﺮ ﻣﺸﺎﺭﻳﻊ‬ ‫‪PMP no : 1350223‬‬ ‫ﻋﻤﻠﺖ ﻓﻲ ﻣﺠﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻣﺠﺔ ﻭﺗﺤﻠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻨﻈﻢ ﻭﺇﺩﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﺎﺭﻳﻊ ﻣﻨﺬ ﻋﺎﻡ ‪ 1999‬ﻡ‬ ‫ﻟﻐﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻣﺠﺔ‪ VB 6.0 :‬ﻭ ‪ Developer 2000‬ﻭ‪Power Builder 9.0, 11.5‬‬ ‫ﻗﻮﺍﻋﺪ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ‪Ms Access, Sybase, MS SQL Server, Oracle 8i,9i,10g :‬‬

‫‪5‬‬

‫ﺗﻌﻠﻢ‬



‫)‪(1-2‬ﺇﻫﺪﺍء‪:‬‬ ‫ﺃﻫﺪﻱ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻞ ﻷﺟﺪﺍﺩﻧﺎ ﺍﻟﺴﺒ‪‬ﺎﻗﲔ ﺇﱃ ﺍﻟﻌﻠﻢ ﻭﺍﳋﲑ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﺬﻳﻦ ﻣﺎ ﻓﺘﺄﺕ ﻗﻠﻮﲠﻢ ﲣﻔﻖ ﻧﺸﻮﺓ ﺍﻻﻧﺘﺼﺎﺭ‬

‫ﰲ ﺷﺘﻰ ﻣﻴﺎﺩﻳﻦ ﺍﳊﻴﺎﺓ ﻳ‪‬ﺴﻄّﺮﻭﻥ ﲝﺮﻭﻑ ﻣﻦ ﻧﻮﺭ ﻣﻌﻨﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﻤﻴﺰ ﻭﺍﻟﺮﻓﻌﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻘﺪﻡ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﻫﺪﻱ ﻛﻞ ﻗﻄﺮﺓ ﻋﺮﻕ‬ ‫ﺗﺰﺍﺣــﻤﺖ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﺟﺴﺎﺩﻫﻢ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﻴﺔ ﺗﺘﺴﺎﺭﻉ ﻟﺘﻄﻔﺊ ﳍﻴﺐ ﺍﻻﻛﺘﺸﺎﻑ ﻭﺍﻻﺧﱰﺍﻉ ﻭﺍﻟﺒﺤﺚ‪ ،‬ﻟﻘﺪ ﺑ‪‬ﻘ‪‬ﻴﺖ ﺃﻋﻤﺎﳍﻢ‬ ‫ﻭﻋﻠﻤﻬﻢ ﻧﱪﺍﺳﺎً ﻣﻀﻴﺌﺎً ﻳﻨﺘﺸﻲ ﺷﻌﺎﻋﻪ ﻳﺒﺪﺩ ﺿﺒﺎﺏ ﺍﳉﻬﻞ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺄﺧﺮ ﻋﻦ ﺭﻛﺐ ﺍﳊﺎﺿﺮ ﻭﺍﳌﺴﺘﻘﺒﻞ ﺍﳌﻨﺸﻮﺩ‬

‫ﻭﺃﺟﺮﻫﻢ ﻣﺴﺘﻤﺮ ﻏﲑ ﻣﻘﻄﻮﻉ‪ ،‬ﻭﺃﲤﻨﻰ ﻣﻦ ﺍ‪ ‬ﺍﻟﻌﻠﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﺪﻳﺮ ﺃﻥ ﻳﻠﻬﻤﲏ ﺍﻹﳝﺎﻥ ﻭﺍﻟﺼﱪ ﻭﺃﻥ ﺃﻗﺪﻡ ﻣﺎ ﰲ‬

‫ﺟﻌﺒﱵ ﻣﻦ ﻋﻠﻢ ﻣﺘﻮﺍﺿﻊ ﺃﻧﺸﺮﻩ ﰲ ﺷﺘﻰ ﺍﻟﻮﺳﺎﺋﻞ ﻻ ﺃﺑﺘﻐﻲ ﻣﻨﻪ ﺇﻻ ﻭﺟﻪ ﺍ‪ ‬ﺗﻌﺎﱃ ﻭﺃﺟﺮ‪ ‬ﻻ ﻳﻨﻘﻄﻊ ﺑﺈﺫﻥ ﺍ‪‬‬ ‫ﻭﺧﺎﻟﺺ ﺩﻋﺎﺋﻜﻢ ﱄ‪.‬‬

‫‪6‬‬

‫ﻣﺤﻤﺪ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺮﻱ‬

‫ﺗﻌﻠﻢ‬



‫)‪ (1-3‬ﻟﻤﺤﺔ ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺨﻴﺔ‪:‬‬

‫ﻟﻐﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻣﺠﺔ ‪ POWER BUILDER‬ﺃﻧﺘﺠﺘﻬﺎ ﺷﺮﻛﺔ ‪ POWER SOFT‬ﻛﻠﻐﺔ ﺭﺍﺋﺪﺓ ﻣﺘﺨﺼﺼﺔ ﺑﺒﻨﺎء ﺑﺮﺍﻣﺞ‬ ‫ﻗﻮﺍﻋﺪ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ‪ ،‬ﻭﻟﻘﺪ ﺍﺷﺘﺮﺕ ﺷﺮﻛﺔ ‪ Sybase‬ﺷﺮﻛﺔ ‪ Power Soft‬ﻣﻊ ﻟﻐﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻣﺠﺔ ‪ Power Builder‬ﻭﺃﺻﺒﺤﺖ‬ ‫ﺟﺰء ﻻ ﻳﺘﺠﺰﺃ ﻣﻨﻬﺎ ﻭﺗﻢ ﺗﻄﻮﻳﺮﻫﺎ ﻭﺍﻟﺮﻗﻲ ﺑﻬﺎ ﺣﺘﻰ ﺃﺻﺒﺤﺖ ﻧﺎﺿﺠﺔ ﺍﻹﻣﻜﺎﻧﻴﺎﺕ ﻭﺍﻷﺩﻭﺍﺕ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻭﻣﻦ ﺑﻌﺾ ﻣﻤﻴﺰﺍﺗﻬﺎ‪:‬‬ ‫‪ ‬ﻭﺍﺟﻬﺔ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﻓﺨﻤﺔ ﻭﻭﺍﺿﺤﺔ ﻭﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﻤﻠﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ ‬ﺳﻬﻮﻟﺔ ﻭﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﻭﻓﻌﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻣﻨﻘﻄﻌﺔ ﺍﻟﻨﻈﻴﺮ ﻓﻲ ﺑﻨﺎء ﺑﺮﺍﻣﺞ ﻗﻮﺍﻋﺪ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ‪ ،‬ﻟﻤﺎ ﺗﺤﻮﻳﻪ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻠﻐﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺃﺩﻭﺍﺕ ﻓﻌﺎﻟﺔ‬ ‫ﺟﺪﺍً ﻭﺧﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﻘﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ ‬ﺳﻬﻮﻟﺔ ﻛﺘﺎﺑﺔ ﺍﻟﻨﺺ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺪﺭﻱ )‪ (Code‬ﻭﻫﻲ ﺷﺒﻴﻪ ﺑﻠﻐﺔ ‪ C++‬ﺃﻭ ‪ ،JAVA‬ﻭﺗﻌﺘﺒﺮ ﺍﻷﻭﺍﻣﺮ ﻣﺄﻟﻮﻓﺔ ﻟﻠﻤﺒﺮﻣﺠﻴﻦ‬ ‫‪ ‬ﺳﻬﻮﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺑﻂ ﻣﻊ ﻗﻮﺍﻋﺪ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ ﻣﺜﻞ ) ‪Oracle, MS SQL SERVER, Sybase, MS Access‬‬ ‫‪.(ODBC‬‬

‫ﻭﻻ ﺑﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﺒﻴﻪ ﻣﻦ ﺃﻥ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻠﻐﺔ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﻨﺘﺸﺮﺓ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻛﺒﻴﺮ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﻕ ﺍﻷﻭﺳﻂ ﻭﺫﻟﻚ ﻟﻌﺪﻡ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺍﻟﺪﻋﻢ ﺍﻟﻔﻨﻲ ﻣﻦ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺸﺮﻛﺔ ﺍﻷﻡ ‪ Sybase‬ﺍﻟﻘﻮﻱ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﻕ ﺍﻷﻭﺳﻂ‪ ،‬ﻭﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺮﻣﺠﻴﻦ ﻣﺤﺘﺮﻓﻲ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻠﻐﺔ ﻗﻠﻴﻞ ﻧﺴﺒﻴﺎ ً ﻓﻲ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻄﻘﺔ‪،‬‬ ‫ﻭﻟﻜﻦ ﻣﺎ ﺃﻥ ﺗﺒﺤﺮ ﻓﻲ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻠﻐﺔ ﻭﺗﺮﻯ ﺇﻣﻜﺎﻧﻴﺎﺗﻬﺎ ﺍﻟﻜﺒﻴﺮﺓ ﺳﺘﻨﺸﺄ ﺑﻴﻨﻚ ﻭﺑﻴﻨﻬﺎ ﺭﻭﺍﺑﻂ ﺗﺸﺠﻌﻚ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﻌﻠﻤﻬﺎ ﻭﺧﺼﻮﺻﺎ ً ﺇﺫﺍ‬ ‫ﻛﻨﺖ ﻣﺤﺘﺮﻑ ﻟﻐﺔ ﺑﺮﻣﺠﺔ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﺳﺘﺸﺎﻫﺪ ﺍﻟﻔﺮﻕ ﻭﺳﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺑﻨﻔﺴﻚ‪.‬‬

‫‪7‬‬

‫ﺗﻌﻠﻢ‬



‫)‪ (1-4‬ﻣﻘﺪﻣﻪ‪:‬‬

‫ﺳﺄﻗﻮﻡ ﺑﺈﺫﻥ ﷲ ﺑﻌﺮﺽ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻤﺎﺩﺓ ﻣﻦ ﻣﻨﻈﻮﺭ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﻭﺍﻗﻌﻲ ﻭﻟﻴﺲ ﺳﺮﺩ ﺃﻛﺎﺩﻳﻤﻲ ﺑﺤﺖ‪ ،‬ﻭﺳﺄﻗﻮﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫ﺇﻣﻜﺎﻧﻴﺎﺕ ‪ (Power Builder 9.0) PB 9.0‬ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻬﻤﻚ ﻛﻤﺒﺮﻣﺞ ﻣﺤﺘﺮﻑ ﺃﻭ ﻣﺒﺘﺪﺉ‪ ،‬ﻭﻫﻨﺎﻙ ﻣﺘﻄﻠﺒﺎﺕ ﻳﻔﺘﺮﺽ ﺃﻥ‬ ‫ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﻣﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻛﻠﻬﺎ ﺃﻭ ﺑﻌﻀﻬﺎ ﻟﺴﺮﻋﺔ ﺗﻌﻠﻤﻚ ‪ PB 9.0‬ﻭﻫﻲ‪:‬‬ ‫‪ .1‬ﺍﻣﺘﻼﻙ ﺧﻠﻔﻴﺔ ﺟﻴﺪﺓ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻣﺠﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺋﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﻛﺨﺒﺮﺓ ﺳﺎﺑﻘﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻌﻤﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻟﻐﺔ ﺑﺮﻣﺠﺔ ﻣﺮﺋﻴﺔ )‪.(Visual‬‬ ‫‪ .2‬ﺍﻹﻁﻼﻉ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺑﺮﺍﻣﺞ ﻣﺮﺗﺒﻄﺔ ﺑﻘﻮﺍﻋﺪ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ‪ ،‬ﻟﺘﻤﺘﻠﻚ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻄﻖ ﻓﻲ ﺑﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﺒﺮﺍﻣﺞ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .3‬ﺍﻣﺘﻼﻙ ﺧﻠﻔﻴﺔ ﺟﻴﺪﺓ ﻋﻦ ﺗﺤﻠﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﻧﻈﻤﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﻫﺬﻩ ﺿﺮﻭﺭﻳﺔ ﻟﻜﻮﻧﻬﺎ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﺼﺮ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻲ ﻓﻲ ﻋﻤﻠﻚ ﻛﻤﺒﺮﻣﺞ ﺃﻧﻈﻤﺔ ﻗﻮﺍﻋﺪ‬ ‫ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ‪ ،‬ﻭﻳﺠﺐ ﺃﻥ ﺗﻌﺮﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ‪:‬‬ ‫‪Primary key ‬‬ ‫‪ ‬ﺑﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﺠﺪﺍﻭﻝ‬ ‫‪Index ‬‬ ‫‪Foreign key ‬‬ ‫‪View ‬‬ ‫‪SQL Statement ‬‬ ‫‪ .4‬ﺍﻣﺘﻼﻙ ﺍﻟﺤﺲ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻣﺠﻲ ﻭﺍﻟﻤﻨﻄﻘﻴﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﻔﻜﻴﺮ ﻓﻲ ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﺑﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﺒﺮﺍﻣﺞ ﻭﺣ ّﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﺎﻛﻞ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻣﺠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺳﺘﻮﺍﺟﻬﻚ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ‬ ‫ﻣﺜﺎﻟﻲ ﻭﺻﺤﻴﺢ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .5‬ﺍﻟﺘﻮﻛﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﷲ ﺗﻌﺎﻟﻰ ﻭﺍﻟﺜﻘﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻨﻔﺲ ﻭﺍﻟﻤﺘﺎﺑﻌﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻤﺮﺓ ﻟﻤﺴﻴﺮﺓ ﺗﻌﻠﻤﻚ‪.‬‬

‫ﺑﻌﺪ ﺩﺭﺍﺳﺔ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻤﺎﺩﺓ ﻭﺗﻄﺒﻴﻘﻬﺎ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎ ً ﻳﺠﺐ ﺃﻥ ﺗﻜﺘﺴﺐ ﺍﻟﻤﻬﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪:‬‬ ‫‪‬‬ ‫‪‬‬ ‫‪‬‬ ‫‪‬‬ ‫‪‬‬

‫‪8‬‬

‫ﺳﺘﺼﺒﺢ ﻣﺒﺮﻣﺞ ﻣﺤﺘﺮﻑ ﻟﻠﻐﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻣﺠﺔ ‪.PB 9.0‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺮﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻣﺔ ﺑﺠﻤﻴﻊ ﺃﺩﻭﺍﺕ ﻭﺗﻘﻨﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟـ ‪ PB 9.0‬ﻭﻛﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻬﺎ ﻭﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﻣﻨﻬﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺮﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﺤﻴﺤﺔ ﺑﻜﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻣﺠﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻷﺻﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﺳﻴﺔ ﺣﺴﺐ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﺎﺕ ﺷﺮﻛﺔ ‪.Sybase‬‬ ‫ﺍﻹﻟﻤﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﺠﻴﺪ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻘﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺑﻴﺔ ﻭﺧﺎﺻﺔ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻤﻠﻜﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺑﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺴﻌﻮﺩﻳﺔ ﻟﺨﺼﻮﺻﻴﺘﻬﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻣﺘﻼﻙ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﻋﺎﻣﺔ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺍﻷﻧﻈﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺠﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺳﺘﺴﻬﻢ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻲ ﺑﻚ ﻛﻤﺒﺮﻣﺞ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻋﺎﻡ‪.‬‬

‫ﺗﻌﻠﻢ‬



‫ﺍﻟﻔﺼﻞ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﻧﻲ‬

‫ﻭﺍﺟﻬﺔ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻖ ‪PB 9.0‬‬ ‫)‪(2-1‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻮﺍﺟﻬﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ‬ ‫)‪(2-2‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ‬ ‫)‪(2-3‬‬ ‫ﺷﺠﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﺋﻨﺎﺕ‬ ‫)‪(2-4‬‬ ‫ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﻨﺴﺦ ﻭﺍﻟﻘﺺ‬ ‫ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺎﻋﺪﺓ )‪(2-5‬‬

‫‪9‬‬

‫ﺗﻌﻠﻢ‬



‫)‪ (2-1‬ﺍﻟﻮﺍﺟﻬﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ ‪:‬‬

‫ﺗﺘﻤﻴﺰ ﻭﺍﺟﻬﺔ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻖ ‪ PB 9.0‬ﺑﺴﻬﻮﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﻭﻭﺿﻮﺣﻬﺎ ﻭﻗﺮﺑﻬﺎ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﻠﺐ‪ ،‬ﺑﺤﻴﺚ ﺗﻌﻄﻴﻚ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ‬ ‫ﺍﻹﻣﻜﺎﻧﻴﺎﺕ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﺒﺴﻂ ﻭﻣﺎ ﻋﻠﻴﻚ ﺳﻮﻯ ﻣﻌﺮﻓﺔ ﻣﺎ ﻫﻲ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﻭﺍﻷﺩﻭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺎﺣﺔ ﻭﻁﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﻋﻤﻠﻬﺎ‬ ‫ﻭﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻬﺎ‪ ،‬ﻭﺃﻭﺩ ﺃﻥ ﺃﺭﻛﺰ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻹﺻﺪﺍﺭ ‪ 8.0‬ﻭﻣﺎ ﻓﻮﻕ ﻟﻪ ﻧﻔﺲ ﻭﺍﺟﻬﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒﺎ ُ ﻭﻟﻜﻦ ﻣﻦ ‪7.0‬‬ ‫ﻭﻣﺎ ﺩﻭﻥ ﺗﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﻠﺤﻮﻅ‪ ،‬ﺃﻧﻈﺮ ﺍﻟﺸﻜﻞ )‪.(2-1‬‬

‫ﺍﻟﺸﻜﻞ )‪(2-1‬‬

‫‪1‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫‪3‬‬ ‫‪4‬‬

‫‪10‬‬

‫ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﺷﺠﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﺋﻨﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﻨﺴﺦ ﻭﺍﻟﻘﺺ‬ ‫ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺎﻋﺪﺓ‪ ،‬ﺑﺤﻴﺚ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﻓﻴﻬﺎ ﺭﺳﺎﺋﻞ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﺄ‬

‫ﺗﻌﻠﻢ‬



‫)‪ (2-2‬ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ‪:‬‬

‫ﻭﺗﺤﻮﻱ ﺇﺟﺮﺍءﺍﺕ ﻭﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﻭﺇﻧﺸﺎء ﺍﻟﻜﺎﺋﻨﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺎﻟـ ‪ PB 9.0‬ﻭ ﻫﻲ ﻛﺎﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ‪:‬‬ ‫‪.1‬‬ ‫‪.2‬‬

‫‪.3‬‬ ‫‪.4‬‬

‫‪.5‬‬

‫‪.6‬‬

‫‪.7‬‬ ‫‪.8‬‬

‫‪.9‬‬

‫‪.10‬‬

‫‪.11‬‬

‫‪.12‬‬ ‫‪.13‬‬

‫‪ New‬ﺟﺪﻳﺪ‪ ،‬ﻹﻧﺸﺎء ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﺋﻨﺎﺕ ‪OBJECTS‬‬ ‫‪ Inherit‬ﺗﻮﺭﻳﺚ‪ ،‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻮﺭﻳﺚ ﺻﻔﺎﺕ ﻛﺎﺋﻦ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻛﺎﺋﻨﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ Open‬ﻓﺘﺢ‪ ،‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﺤﺚ ﻭﻓﺘﺢ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﺋﻨﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﺮﻭﻉ ﻣﺜﺎﻝ)ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺎﺕ‪ ،‬ﻧﻮﺍﻓﺬ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ‪،‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺍﺋﻢ‪.(...،‬‬ ‫‪ ،Run, Preview Object‬ﺗﻨﻔﻴﺬ ﺃﻭ ﻣﻌﺎﻳﻨﺔ ﻛﺎﺋﻦ‬ ‫ﻟﻴﻌﻄﻴﻚ ﺗﺼﻮﺭ ﻋﻦ ﺷﻜﻠﻪ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻔﻴﺬ‪ ،‬ﻣﺜﺎﻝ)ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺎﺕ‪،‬‬ ‫ﻧﻮﺍﻓﺬ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺍﺋﻢ‪.(...،‬‬ ‫‪ ،System Tree‬ﺷﺠﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﺗﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺸﻜﻞ ﺃﻋﻼﻩ ﺭﻗﻢ) ‪ (2-1‬ﻣﺮﺑﻊ ﺭﻗﻢ ) ‪ (2‬ﻭﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﺸﺠﺮﺓ‬ ‫ﺗﻌﺮﺽ ﻛﻞ ﻣﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﺮﻭﻉ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﺮﺗﺐ‬ ‫ﻭﻣﻨﻈﻢ ﻭﺑﺈﻣﻜﺎﻧﻚ ﺃﻥ ﺗﻨﺸﺄ ﺗﺮﺗﻴﺐ ﺧﺎﺹ ﺑﻚ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ Output‬ﻣﺨﺮﺟﺎﺕ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﺗﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺸﻜﻞ ﺃﻋﻼﻩ‬ ‫ﺭﻗﻢ)‪ (2-1‬ﻣﺮﺑﻊ ﺭﻗﻢ ) ‪ (4‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺇﺧﺮﺍﺝ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻭﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺍﻹﺟﺮﺍءﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺃﻥ ﺗﺤﺪﺙ‪ ،‬ﻣﺜﺎﻝ)ﻋﻨﺪ‬ ‫ﺗﻨﻔﻴﺬ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﻭﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﻈﻬﺮ ﺧﻄﺄ ﻓﻲ ﺃﺣﺪ ﺟﻤﻞ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻣﺠﺔ ﻓﺈﻥ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﺄ ﺳﺘﻈﻬﺮ ﻓﻲ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺑﻊ(‬ ‫‪ ،Next Error/Message‬ﺍﻟﺬﻫﺎﺏ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﺄ ﺃﻭ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ ،Previous Error/Message‬ﺍﻟﺬﻫﺎﺏ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﺄ‬ ‫ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺑﻘﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ To-Do-List‬ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺑﺎﻷﻋﻤﺎﻝ ﻭﻫﻲ ﻁﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﺟﻴﺪﺓ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺑﺄﻥ ﺗﺴﺘﻐﻠﻬﺎ ﻟﻜﻲ ﺗﺪﻭﻥ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺃﻋﻤﺎﻟﻚ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺏ ﺇﻧﺠﺎﺯﻫﺎ ﻟﻴﺴﻬﻞ ﻋﻠﻴﻚ ﺗﻌﻘﺐ ﺍﻹﻧﺠﺎﺯﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ‬ ‫ﺃﻧﺠﺰﺕ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻟﻢ ﺗﻨﺠﺰ‪ ،‬ﻛﻤﺎ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺭﺑﻂ ﺃﻱ ﻛﺎﺋﻦ ﻣﻊ‬ ‫ﺷﺮﺡ ﺑﺴﻴﻂ ﻟﻪ ﺑﺤﻴﺚ ﺗﺴﺘﻄﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﻭﺍﻟﻔﺘﺢ ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻳﻊ‬ ‫ﻟﻬﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﺋﻦ ﻋﻦ ﻁﺮﻳﻖ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﺭﺗﺒﺎﻁ ﺧﺎﺹ ﺑﻪ ﻓﻲ ﻫﺬﻩ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻭﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻟﻠﻜﺎﺋﻨﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﻛﺜﺮ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ Browser‬ﻣﺴﺘﻜﺸﻒ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺗﻌﺮﺽ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﺋﻨﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﺮﻭﻉ ﻻﺳﺘﻌﺮﺍﺽ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ‬ ‫)‪ (Properties, Events, Functions‬ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﻜﻞ‬ ‫ﻛﺎﺋﻦ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ Clip Window‬ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﺒﻚ ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﺗﻬﺎ‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺸﻜﻞ ﺃﻋﻼﻩ ﺭﻗﻢ) ‪ (2-1‬ﻣﺮﺑﻊ ﺭﻗﻢ ) ‪ (3‬ﻭﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ‬ ‫ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻢ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻨﺼﻮﺹ ﻛﺘﺮﻣﻴﺰ ﺩﺍﺋﻢ ﺗﺴﺘﻄﻴﻊ‬ ‫ﺃﻥ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣﻬﺎ ﻭﺗﻨﺴﺨﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺠﻚ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ Library‬ﻣﻜﺘﺒﺔ‪ ،‬ﻋﺮﺽ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺘﺒﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ‬ ‫ﺑﺎﻟﻤﺸﺮﻭﻉ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﻟﻤﻜﺘﺒﺔ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻟﺘﺠﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﺋﻨﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﻛﺠﺰﺋﻴﺎﺕ ﻣﻨﻔﺼﻠﺔ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﻴﺎ ً‪.‬‬ ‫‪ DB Profile‬ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﻘﻮﺍﻋﺪ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ‪ ،‬ﻣﻦ‬ ‫ﺧﻼﻟﻬﺎ ﺳﺘﺘﻤﻜﻦ ﻣﻦ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺭﻭﺍﺑﻂ ﻣﻊ ﺃﻧﻮﺍﻉ ﻛﺜﻴﺮﺓ ﻣﻦ‬ ‫ﻗﻮﺍﻋﺪ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ‪ ،‬ﻭﺭﺑﻄﻬﺎ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﻚ‪.‬‬

‫)‪ (2-2‬ﺷﺠﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﺋﻨﺎﺕ‪:‬‬ ‫‪.1‬‬ ‫‪.2‬‬

‫‪.3‬‬ ‫‪.4‬‬

‫‪11‬‬

‫‪.9‬‬ ‫‪.10‬‬

‫‪.11‬‬

‫‪.12‬‬

‫‪.13‬‬

‫‪.14‬‬

‫‪EA Server Profile‬‬ ‫‪ Database‬ﻗﻮﺍﻋﺪ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ‪ ،‬ﻭﻫﻲ ﺟﺰﺋﻴﺔ ﺧﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﻜﻞ ﻣﺎ ﻳﺘﻌﻠﻖ‬ ‫ﺑﺒﻨﺎء ﻗﺎﻋﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺃﻱ ﻣﺤﺮﺭ ﻗﺎﻋﺪﺓ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻭﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ‬ ‫ﺑﻬﻴﻜﻠﻴﺔ ﻗﺎﻋﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻣﺜﺎﻝ)ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﻭﺣﺬﻑ ﺟﺪﻭﻝ‪ ،‬ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﻭﺣﺬﻑ‬ ‫ﺣﻘﻞ‪(...،‬‬ ‫‪ Edit‬ﻣﺤﺮﺭ ﺍﻟﻨﺼﻮﺹ‪ ،‬ﺑﺈﻣﻜﺎﻧﻚ ﺇﻧﺸﺎء ﻭﻓﺘﺢ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﻧﺼﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﻟﻼﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺠﺎﻧﺒﻲ ﻣﺜﺎﻝ )ﺑﺈﻣﻜﺎﻧﻚ ﺣﻔﻆ ﻓﻴﻪ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺍﻷﻭﺍﻣﺮ ﻭﺛﻢ‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻬﺎ ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ(‪.‬‬ ‫‪ Incremental Build Workspace‬ﻋﻤﻞ ﻓﺤﺺ ﻭﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ‬ ‫ﺑﻨﺎء ﻟﺠﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﺋﻨﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺠﺪﻳﺪﺓ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻢ ﺗﻌﺪﻳﻠﻬﺎ ﻓﻘﻂ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ Full Build Workspace‬ﻋﻤﻞ ﻓﺤﺺ ﻭﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺑﻨﺎء ﻟﺠﻤﻴﻊ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻜﺎﺋﻨﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺠﺪﻳﺪﺓ ﻭﺍﻟﻘﺪﻳﻤﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﻤﻌﺪﻟﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﻐﻴﺮ ﻣﻌﺪﻟﻪ‪ ،‬ﻭﻫﺬﻩ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ‬ ‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﻣﺸﻜﻠﺔ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﻌﺮﻭﻓﺔ ﻟﻜﺎﺋﻦ ﺃﻭ ﻋﺪﺓ ﻛﺎﺋﻨﺎﺕ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺸﺮﻭﻉ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ exe‬ﻟﻠﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ‬ ‫‪ Deploy Workspace‬ﺇﻧﺸﺎء ﻣﻠﻒ ﺗﻨﻔﻴﺬﻱ‬ ‫ﻭﺇﻧﺸﺎء ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ‪ PBD‬ﺗﺤﻮﻱ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﺋﻨﺎﺕ ﻣﻦ ﺷﺎﺷﺎﺕ ﻭﻏﻴﺮﻫﺎ‬ ‫ﻭﻟﻜﻦ ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺪﻳﻞ ﻋﻠﻴﻬﺎ‪.‬‬

‫‪.15‬‬

‫‪ Skip Build‬ﺗﺨﻄﻲ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﺋﻨﺎﺕ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺇﻧﺸﺎء ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻔﻴﺬﻱ‪.‬‬

‫‪.16‬‬

‫‪ Stop Build‬ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺇﻧﺸﺎء ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻔﻴﺬﻱ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ Debug Now‬ﺗﺘﺒﻊ ﺗﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﺍﻷﺧﻄﺎء ﺍﻟﻔﻮﺭﻱ‪ ،‬ﻳﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺘﺘﺒﻊ‬ ‫ﺗﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﺍﻷﺧﻄﺎء ﻋﻦ ﻁﺮﻳﻖ ﺗﻨﻔﻴﺬ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﻣﻦ ﺑﺪﺍﻳﺘﻪ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺮﺍﺣﻞ‬ ‫ﺗﺴﺘﻄﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺑﻤﺴﺎﺭﻙ ﻭﺗﺨﻄﻲ ﻋﺪﺓ ﻣﺮﺍﺣﻞ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻔﺼﻴﻠﻬﺎ‪.‬‬

‫‪.17‬‬

‫‪.18‬‬

‫‪.19‬‬

‫‪.20‬‬

‫‪ Select and Debug‬ﺗﺨﺘﺎﺭ ﻛﺎﺋﻦ ﻣﻌﻴﻦ ﻭﺗﺘﺒﻊ ﺗﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﺍﻷﺧﻄﺎء‬ ‫ﻓﻘﻂ ﻟﻬﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﺋﻦ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ Run‬ﺗﻨﻔﻴﺬ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﺧﺘﺼﺎﺭ ﻣﻦ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ‬ ‫‪.CTRL+R‬‬ ‫‪ Select And Run‬ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻫﺪﻑ ﻣﻌﻴﻦ ﻋﻨﺪ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺃﻛﺜﺮ ﻣﻦ ﻫﺪﻑ‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺛﻢ ﺗﻨﻔﻴﺬﻩ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ Exit‬ﺧﺮﻭﺝ ﻣﻦ ‪. PB 9.0‬‬

‫‪.21‬‬

‫‪ Workspace‬ﻓﻀﺎء ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻞ‪ ،‬ﻭﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻹﻣﻜﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﺗﻢ ﺇﺩﺭﺍﺟﻬﺎ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻹﺻﺪﺍﺭ ‪ 8.0‬ﻭﻟﻢ ﺗﻜﻦ ﻣﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻹﺻﺪﺍﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺑﻘﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟـ ‪ PB‬ﻭﻫﻲ ﺇﻣﻜﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﻟﻜﻲ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﺣﺘﻮﺍء ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﻚ ﻭﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﻛﺎﺋﻨﺎﺗﻪ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﻨﻈﻢ‪ ،‬ﻭﺭ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺃﻥ ﻳﺤﺘﻮﻱ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﻮﺍﺣﺪ ﺃﻛﺜﺮ ﻣﻦ ﻓﻀﺎء ﻋﻤﻞ‪.‬‬ ‫‪Target‬ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ‪ ،‬ﻭﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻹﻣﻜﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﺗﻢ ﺇﺩﺭﺍﺟﻬﺎ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻹﺻﺪﺍﺭ ‪ 8.0‬ﻭﻟﻢ ﺗﻜﻦ ﻣﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻹﺻﺪﺍﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺑﻘﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟـ ‪ PB‬ﻭﻫﻲ ﺇﻣﻜﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﻴﺔ ﺗﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﻣﻦ‬ ‫ﺿﻢ ﺃﻛﺜﺮ ﻣﻦ ﻫﺪﻑ )ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ( ﺗﺤﺖ ﻓﻀﺎء ﻋﻤﻞ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ ﻭﺑﺈﻣﻜﺎﻧﻚ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺎﻣﻞ ﻣﻊ ﻛﻞ ﻫﺪﻑ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻧﻪ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﻣﻨﻔﺼﻞ‪ ،‬ﻭﺿﻢ ﺃﻛﺜﺮ ﻣﻦ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﻓﻲ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﺔ‬ ‫ﻛﺄﻫﺪﺍﻑ ﻳﺴﻬﻞ ﻋﻠﻴﻚ ﻧﻘﻞ ﻭﻧﺴﺦ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﺋﻨﺎﺕ ﻣﻦ ﻫﺪﻑ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺁﺧﺮ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﺒﺎﺷﺮ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ Library‬ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺘﺒﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻹﻣﻜﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﻣﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻹﺻﺪﺍﺭ ‪ 5.0‬ﺣﺴﺐ ﻋﻠﻤﻲ‪ ،‬ﻭﻫﻲ ﺇﻣﻜﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﻴﺔ ﺗﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﻣﻦ ﺗﺼﻨﻴﻒ ﻋﻤﻠﻚ ﻛﻤﺎ ﻫﻮ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﺭﺽ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻮﺍﻗﻊ ﻭﺿﻢ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﺋﻨﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﻜﻞ ﺗﺼﻨﻴﻒ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻜﺘﺒﺔ ﺗﺤﻤﻞ ﺍﺳﻢ ﺫﻭ ﺩﻻﻟﺔ‪ ،‬ﻣﺜﺎﻝ‪ :‬ﻟﻨﻔﺘﺮﺽ ﺃﻧﻚ ﺑﺼﺪﺩ ﺑﻨﺎء ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﻣﺤﺎﺳﺒﻲ ﻳﺸﻤﻞ)ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺰﻭﻥ‪،‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺤﺴﺎﺑﺎﺕ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﻤﻮﻅﻔﻴﻦ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﺼﻴﺎﻧﺔ( ﻓﻜﻞ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﺠﺰﺋﻴﺎﺕ ﺗﺘﻜﻮﻥ ﻣﻦ ﻛﺎﺋﻨﺎﺕ)ﺷﺎﺷﺎﺕ‪ ،‬ﻗﻮﺍﺋﻢ‪ ،‬ﻧﻮﺍﻓﺬ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ‪ (...،‬ﻓﻤﻦ ﺍﻷﻓﻀﻞ ﺑﻨﺎء ﻣﻜﺘﺒﺎﺕ ﺗﻀﻢ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﺋﻨﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﻬﺎ‪ ،‬ﻭﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻹﻣﻜﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﺗﺴﻬﻞ ﻋﻠﻴﻚ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺎﺑﻌﺔ ﻭﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﺤﺚ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ Application‬ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻖ‪ ،‬ﻛﺎﺋﻦ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﺮﺋﻲ ﻭﻫﻮ ﺃﻭﻝ ﻛﺎﺋﻦ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻨﻔﻴﺬﻩ ﻋﻨﺪ ﻋﻤﻞ ‪ Run‬ﻟﻠﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﻭﻳﺘﻢ ﺇﺩﺭﺍﺝ ﺟﻤﻞ ﺍﻟﺮﺑﻂ ﻣﻊ ﻗﺎﻋﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ‪.‬‬

‫ﺗﻌﻠﻢ‬



‫ﺍﻟﻔﺼﻞ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﻟﺚ‬ ‫‪PB Objects‬‬

‫ﻛﺎﺋﻨﺎﺕ ﺑﻮﺭ ﺑﻴﻠﺪﺭ‬

‫‪12‬‬

‫ﺗﻌﻠﻢ‬



‫ﻣﺎ ﻫﻮ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﺋﻦ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟـ ‪ :Object‬ﻫﻮ ﻋﺒﺎﺭﺓ ﻋﻦ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﻣﺘﺮﺍﺑﻄﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺨﺼﺎﺋﺺ ﻭﺍﻷﺣﺪﺍﺙ ﻭﺍﻟﻮﻅﺎﺋﻒ ﺗﺮﺳﻢ ﺻﻔﺔ‬ ‫ﻋﺎﻣﺔ ﻳﻄﻠﻖ ﻋﻠﻴﻬﺎ ﺍﺳﻢ ﻛﺎﺋﻦ‪ ،‬ﻭﻫﻨﺎﻙ ﺃﻧﻮﺍﻉ ﻣﻦ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﺋﻨﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻬﺔ‪:‬‬ ‫‪ Visual Object .1‬ﺍﻟﻜﺎﺋﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺋﻲ‪ :‬ﻣﺜﻞ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﻌﻨﺎﺻﺮ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ Non Visual Object .2‬ﺍﻟﻜﺎﺋﻦ ﺍﻟﻐﻴﺮ ﻣﺮﺋﻲ‪ :‬ﻣﺜﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻖ ‪ ،Application‬ﻣﺜﻞ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﻛﺔ ‪.Transaction‬‬ ‫‪ User Object .3‬ﻛﺎﺋﻨﺎﺕ ﻣﻦ ﺻﻨﻌﻚ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ‪ :‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺑﺘﻜﺎﺭ ﻛﺎﺋﻦ ﺧﺎﺹ ﺑﻚ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺇﻋﻄﺎﺋﻪ ﺧﺼﺎﺋﺺ ﻭﺃﺣﺪﺍﺙ‬ ‫ﻭﻭﻅﺎﺋﻒ ﻟﺘﺄﺩﻳﺔ ﻋﻤﻞ ﻣﻌﻴﻦ ﻣﺜﺎﻝ‪ :‬ﺇﻧﺸﺎء ﺗﻘﻮﻳﻢ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻭﻟﻘﺪ ﺃﺣﺪﺛﺖ ﺑﺮﻣﺠﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﺋﻨﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻬﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺋﻴﺔ ‪ Visual Object Oriented Programming‬ﺛﻮﺭﺓ ﻓﻲ ﻋﺎﻟﻢ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻣﺠﻴﺎﺕ ﻭﺻﻨﺎﻋﺘﻬﺎ ﺇﺫ ﺃﺻﺒﺤﺖ ﻟﻐﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻣﺠﺔ ﺗﺘﻨﺎﻓﺲ ﺃﻳﻬﻢ ﻳﻘﺪﻡ ﻛﺎﺋﻨﺎﺕ ﺃﻗﻮﻯ ﻭﺫﺍﺕ ﺇﻣﻜﺎﻧﻴﺎﺕ ﺃﻛﺒﺮ ﻭﺃﺳﻬﻞ‬ ‫ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻬﺎ‪ ،‬ﻭﻟﻬﺬﺍ ﺍﻷﺛﺮ ﺍﻷﻛﺒﺮ ﻓﻲ ﻧﻘﻞ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻣﺠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻌﻤﻞ ﺗﺤﺖ ﺑﻴﺌﺔ ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ‪ Ms Dos‬ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺌﺔ ﺍﻟﺠﺪﻳﺪﺓ ﻣﻦ‬ ‫ﺃﻧﻈﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺋﻴﺔ ‪ Windows‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻓﺘﺮﺍﺽ ﺃﻥ ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ‪ Windows‬ﺍﻷﻛﺜﺮ ﺍﻧﺘﺸﺎﺭﺍ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻟﻢ ﻣﻊ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ‬ ‫ﺃﻧﻈﻤﺔ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻣﺮﺋﻴﺔ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺃﺭﻳﺪ ﺃﻥ ﺃﺭﻛﺰ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻟﻔﻬﻢ ﺍﻟﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﻟﻠﻜﺎﺋﻨﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻬﺔ ﺳﻴﺴﻬﻞ ﻋﻠﻴﻚ ﻛﻤﺒﺮﻣﺞ ﻣﺒﺘﺪﺉ ﺍﻟﺪﺧﻮﻝ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﺎﺏ ﺍﻟﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﻟﻬﺬﺍ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻟﻢ ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻲ ﺑﺤﻴﺚ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺷﻖ ﻁﺮﻳﻖ ﺧﺎﺹ ﺑﻚ ﺑﻌﻴﺪﺍً ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﻠﻴﺪ ﺍﻷﻋﻤﻰ ﻟﻠﻐﻴﺮ‪ ،‬ﺑﺈﻣﻜﺎﻧﻚ ﺍﻣﺘﻼﻙ ﺍﻷﺩﻭﺍﺕ ﻭﺍﻹﻣﻜﺎﻧﻴﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﻷﻱ ﻟﻐﺔ ﺑﺮﻣﺠﺔ ﻭﺑﺈﻣﻜﺎﻧﻚ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻬﺎ ﻟﻌﻤﻞ ﻣﺸﺮﻭﻉ ﻳﺤﻤﻞ ﺑﺼﻤﺘﻚ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻔﺮﺩﺓ‪ ،‬ﻭ ﺃﻭﺩ ﺃﻥ ﺃﻫﻤﺲ ﻓﻲ ﺇﺫﻧﻚ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺍﻷﻣﻮﺭ ﻋﻠﻬﺎ‬ ‫ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺳﺒﺒﺎ ً ﻓﻲ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭﻙ ﻟﻠﻐﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻣﺠﺔ ‪ Power Builder‬ﻟﻐﺔ ﺭﺳﻤﻴﺔ ﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻘﺎﺗﻚ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻗﻮﺍﻋﺪ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ‪:‬‬ ‫‪ ‬ﺃﻧﺘﺒﻪ ﻟﻠﻐﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺃﻥ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣﻬﺎ ﻣﺎ ﻫﻲ ﺍﻹﻣﻜﺎﻧﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻘﺪﻣﻬﺎ ﻟﻚ ﻛﻤﺒﺮﻣﺞ ﻣﺒﺘﺪﺉ ﺃﻭ ﻣﺤﺘﺮﻑ ﻭﺧﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻤﺘﻌﻠﻘﺔ‬ ‫ﺑﻘﻮﺍﻋﺪ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ‪ ،‬ﻫﻞ ﻫﻲ ﺷﺎﻣﻠﺔ؟ ﻫﻞ ﻫﻲ ﺳﻬﻠﺔ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﺗﻌﻘﻴﺪﺍﺕ ﻭﻟﻒ ﻭﺩﻭﺭﺍﻥ؟ ﻫﻞ ﺗﻮﻓﺮ ﻟﻚ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﺤﻠﻮﻝ‬ ‫ﺍﻻﺣﺘﺮﺍﻓﻴﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﻤﺘﻘﺪﻣﺔ؟ ﻧﻌﻢ ﻫﻲ ﻟﻐﺔ ‪.Power Builder‬‬ ‫‪ ‬ﻻ ﻳﻐﺮﻧﻚ ﺍﻻﻧﺘﺸﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻜﺒﻴﺮ ﻷﺣﺪ ﺍﻟﻠﻐﺎﺕ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺘﻚ ﻭﻫﺬﺍ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺃﻥ ﺗﻘﻞ ﻓﺮﺻﻚ ﺑﺎﻟﻤﻨﺎﻓﺴﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻮﻅﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﻏﺮﺓ‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ﺳﻮﻕ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻞ‪ ،‬ﻭﻟﻜﻦ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﻣﺤﺘﺮﻑ ‪ Power Builder‬ﺳﻴﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﺣﺘﺮﺍﻓﻚ ﻟﻪ ﻣﺼﺪﺭ ﻗﻮﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺒﺤﺚ ﻋﻦ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻮﻅﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﻏﺮﺓ ﻟﻌﺪﻡ ﺍﻧﺘﺸﺎﺭﻫﺎ ﺍﻟﻜﺒﻴﺮ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﻕ ﺍﻷﻭﺳﻂ ﻓﻴﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﻄﻠﺐ ﻗﻠﻴﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻠﻐﺔ ﻭﻟﻜﻦ ﺳﻴﻜﻮﻥ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺩﻭﺩ ﺍﻟﻤﺎﻟﻲ ﻛﺒﻴﺮ ﻟﻌﺪﻡ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﻣﻨﺎﻓﺴﺔ ﻛﺒﻴﺮﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻭﻅﺎﺋﻒ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻠﻐﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺳﻮﻕ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻞ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ ‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻌﻠﻤﺖ ﺃﻱ ﻟﻐﺔ ﺑﺮﻣﺠﺔ ﻣﺮﺋﻴﺔ ﺑﺎﺣﺘﺮﺍﻓﻴﺔ ﻓﻠﻴﺲ ﻋﻠﻴﻚ ﺑﺄﺱ ﻓﻲ ﺍﺣﺘﺮﺍﻓﻚ ﻟﻐﺔ ﺑﺮﻣﺠﺔ ﻣﺮﺋﻴﺔ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪ ،‬ﻓﺒﺈﻣﻜﺎﻧﻚ ﺍﻟﺠﻤﻊ‬ ‫ﺑﻴﻦ ﺃﻛﺜﺮ ﻣﻦ ﻟﻐﺔ ﺑﺮﻣﺠﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺁﻥ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ ﺑﻞ ﺑﺎﻟﻌﻜﺲ ﻫﺬﺍ ﻳﺜﺮﻱ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺗﻚ ﻭﺧﺒﺮﺍﺗﻚ ﻭﻓﺮﺻﻚ ﺑﺎﻟﻨﺠﺎﺡ ﻭﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﻣﻦ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻘﺎﺭﻧﺔ ﺑﻴﻦ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻠﻐﺎﺕ ﻭﺃﻳﻬﻤﺎ ﺃﻗﻮﻯ ﺗﻘﻨﻴﺎ ً‪.‬‬ ‫ﺃﺭﺟﻮﺍ ﻣﻨﻚ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻔﺼﻞ ﻟﻔﻬﻢ ﻣﺎ ﻳﺤﺘﻮﻳﻪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﺋﻨﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﺎﻟـ ‪. PB‬‬

‫‪13‬‬

‫ﺗﻌﻠﻢ‬



‫ﻛﻴﻒ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺈﻧﺸﺎء ﺃﺣﺪ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﺋﻨﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺋﻴﺔ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟـ ‪:PB 9.0‬‬ ‫‪ .1‬ﺍﺫﻫﺐ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﺔ ﻭﺍﺧﺘﺮ ) ‪ NEW‬ﺟﺪﻳﺪ ( ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .2‬ﺳﺘﻈﻬﺮ ﻟﻚ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻓﺮﻋﻴﺔ ﻓﻴﻬﺎ ﻣﻌﻈﻢ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﺋﻨﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺑﻌﺔ ﻟﻠـ ‪ ،PB‬ﺍﻧﻈﺮ ﺍﻟﺸﻜﻞ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ ﺭﻗﻢ )‪.(3-1‬‬

‫ﺷﻜﻞ ﺭﻗﻢ )‪(3-1‬‬ ‫‪ PB‬ﻭﺳﻴﻜﻮﻥ ﻓﻴﻬﺎ ﺗﺮﺗﻴﺐ ﺣﺴﺐ‬ ‫ﺳﺄﻗﻮﻡ ﺑﺘﻔﺼﻴﻞ ﺃﻫﻢ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﺋﻨﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺤﺘﺎﺟﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺑﻨﺎء ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﺣﺘﺮﺍﻓﻲ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻟﻐﺔ ﺍﻟـ‬ ‫ﺍﻷﻭﻟﻮﻳﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺑﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﺒﺮﺍﻣﺞ‪ ،‬ﻭﻟﻜﻲ ﺗﻜﺘﻤﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻳﺠﺐ ﻋﻠﻴﻨﺎ ﺃﻥ ﻧﻤﺜﻞ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻔﻘﺮﺓ ﺑﻤﺜﺎﻝ ﻭﺍﻗﻌﻲ ﻟﻜﻲ ﺗﺼﻞ ﺍﻟﻔﻜﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺑﺔ‬ ‫ﺑﺴﻬﻮﻟﺔ‪ ،‬ﺩﻋﻨﻲ ﺍﺳﺄﻝ ﺍﻟﺴﺆﺍﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ‪:‬‬ ‫ﻛﻴﻒ ﺃﺑﻨﻲ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺠﺎ ً ﻋﻠﻰ ﻟﻐﺔ ﺍﻟـ ‪PB 9.0‬؟‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺠﻮﺍﺏ‪ :‬ﺑﺈﻣﻜﺎﻧﻚ ﺑﻨﺎء ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﻟـ ‪ PB 9.0‬ﺑﻤﺮﺍﻋﺎﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ‪:‬‬ ‫ﺃﻭﻻً( ﻳﺠﺐ ﺗﻤﻴﻴﺰ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﺋﻨﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻬﻴﻜﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻌﺘﺒﺮ ﺃﺳﺎﺱ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺸﻮﺩ ﻭﻫﻲ ) ‪Workspace, Target,‬‬ ‫‪ (Application, Library‬ﻭﻫﺬﻩ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺑﻨﺎﺋﻬﺎ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﺒﺪﺋﻲ ﻛﻬﻴﻜﻞ ﻟﻠﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﻭﻛﺨﻄﻮﺓ ﺃﻭﻟﻰ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻛﻴﻒ ﺃﺑﻨﻲ ‪Workspace‬؟‬ ‫‪ .1‬ﺍﺫﻫﺐ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ ﻭﺍﺧﺘﺮ ) ‪ NEW‬ﺟﺪﻳﺪ ( ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .2‬ﺳﺘﻈﻬﺮ ﻟﻚ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻓﺮﻋﻴﺔ ﻓﻴﻬﺎ ﻣﻌﻈﻢ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﺋﻨﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺑﻌﺔ ﻟﻠـ ‪ ،PB‬ﺍﻧﻈﺮ ﺍﻟﺸﻜﻞ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ ﺭﻗﻢ )‪.(3-2‬‬ ‫‪ .3‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ‪.Workspace‬‬ ‫‪ .4‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪. Ok‬‬

‫‪14‬‬

‫ﺗﻌﻠﻢ‬



‫ﺷﻜﻞ ﺭﻗﻢ )‪(3-2‬‬ ‫‪ Workspace‬ﺑﺎﺳﻢ ﻓﺎﻷﻓﻀﻞ ﺃﻥ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺈﻧﺸﺎء ﻣﺠﻠﺪ ﺟﺪﻳﺪ ﻭﻟﻴﻜﻦ ﺃﺳﻤﻪ‬ ‫‪ .5‬ﺳﺘﻈﻬﺮ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻟﺤﻔﻆ‬ ‫‪ NewProject‬ﺃﻧﻈﺮ ﺍﻟﺸﻜﻞ ﺭﻗﻢ )‪.(3-3‬‬

‫ﺷﻜﻞ ﺭﻗﻢ )‪(3-3‬‬ ‫‪ .6‬ﺛﻢ ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﺪﺧﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﻠﺪ ‪ NewProject‬ﻭﻗﻢ ﺑﻜﺘﺎﺑﺔ ﺍﺳﻢ ﻟﻠـ ‪ Workspace‬ﻭﻟﻴﻜﻦ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺳﺒﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺜﺎﻝ‬ ‫‪ Newspace‬ﺃﻧﻈﺮ ﺍﻟﺸﻜﻞ ﺭﻗﻢ )‪.(3-4‬‬

‫‪15‬‬

‫ﺗﻌﻠﻢ‬



‫ﺷﻜﻞ ﺭﻗﻢ )‪(3-4‬‬ ‫‪ .7‬ﺳﻴﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﻟـ ‪ Workspace‬ﻓﻲ ﺷﺠﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ ﻛﻤﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺸﻜﻞ ﺭﻗﻢ )‪.(3-5‬‬

‫ﺷﻜﻞ ﺭﻗﻢ )‪(3-5‬‬

‫‪16‬‬

‫ﺗﻌﻠﻢ‬



‫• ﻛﻴﻒ ﺃﺑﻨﻲ ‪ Target‬ﻭ ‪ Application‬ﻭ ‪Library‬؟‬ ‫ﺗﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻟـ ‪ PB 9.0‬ﻣﻦ ﺑﻨﺎء ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﺋﻨﺎﺕ ﺩﻓﻌﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ ﻟﺘﺴﻬﻴﻞ ﺃﻣﺮ ﺑﻨﺎء ﻫﻴﻜﻠﻴﺔ ﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺠﻚ ﺍﻟﺠﺪﻳﺪ‪ ،‬ﺃﻧﻈﺮ ﺍﻟﺸﻜﻞ‬ ‫ﺭﻗﻢ )‪ (3-6‬ﺃﺭﺟﻮﺍ ﺍﻻﻧﺘﺒﺎﻩ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺭﻗﻢ ‪ 4‬ﻭ ‪ 5‬ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺸﻜﻞ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ‪:‬‬ ‫‪ : Template Application‬ﻫﻲ ﻋﺒﺎﺭﺓ ﻋﻦ ‪ Wizard‬ﻣﺴﺎﻋﺪ ﺑﻨﺎء ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺑﻨﺎء‬ ‫‪4‬‬ ‫ﺍﻹﻁﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻡ ﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺠﻚ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺳﺮﻳﻊ ﻭﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻹﻁﻼﻉ ﻋﻠﻴﻬﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫‪5‬‬

‫‪ :Existing Application‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺃﻥ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺎﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ‪ Application‬ﻣﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﻣﺴﺒﻘﺎ ً‪.‬‬

‫‪3‬‬

‫‪ :Application‬ﻭﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﺠﺰﺋﻴﺔ ﻫﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻬﻤﻨﺎ ﻳﺠﺐ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﻋﻠﻴﻬﺎ‪.‬‬

‫ﺳﻨﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺸﺮﺡ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﻄﺔ ﺭﻗﻢ ‪.Application 3‬‬ ‫‪ .1‬ﺃﺫﻫﺐ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ ﻭﺃﺧﺘﺮ ) ‪ New‬ﺟﺪﻳﺪ‬ ‫‪ .2‬ﺛﻢ ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ‪.Target‬‬ ‫‪ .3‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ‪.Application‬‬ ‫‪ .4‬ﺛﻢ ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ‪.Ok‬‬

‫(‪.‬‬

‫ﺷﻜﻞ ﺭﻗﻢ )‪(3-6‬‬ ‫ﺳﺘﻈﻬﺮ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺗﺤﺪﺩ ﻓﻴﻬﺎ ﺍﺳﻢ ﺍﻟـ ‪ Application‬ﻓﻘﻂ ﻭﻣﻦ ﺛﻢ ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺇﻧﺸﺎء ﺍﺳﻢ ﺍﻟـ ‪ Target‬ﻭ‪Library‬‬ ‫ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺁﻟﻲ ﺃﻧﻈﺮ ﺍﻟﺸﻜﻞ ﺭﻗﻢ )‪ ،(3-7‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﻜﺘﺎﺑﺔ ﺍﺳﻢ ﺍﻟـ ‪ Application‬ﻭﻟﻴﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﻤﻪ ‪.newapplication‬‬

‫‪17‬‬

‫ﺗﻌﻠﻢ‬



‫ﺷﻜﻞ ﺭﻗﻢ )‪(3-7‬‬ ‫ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺑﻨﺎء ﺍﻟـ ‪ Application‬ﻭ ﺍﻟـ ‪ Target‬ﻭ ﺍﻟـ ‪ ،Library‬ﻓﻲ ﺷﺠﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ ﺃﻧﻈﺮ ﺍﻟﺸﻜﻞ ﺭﻗﻢ )‪.(3-8‬‬

‫ﺷﻜﻞ ﺭﻗﻢ )‪(3-8‬‬ ‫ﻓﻬﻜﺬﺍ ﻧﻜﻮﻥ ﻗﺪ ﺃﻧﻬﻴﻨﺎ ﺑﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﻬﻴﻜﻞ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﺎﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﻭﺳﻨﻨﺘﻘﻞ ﻟﻠﺨﻄﻮﺓ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﻭﻫﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻑ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﺋﻨﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺎﻟـ‬ ‫‪.PB 9.0‬‬

‫‪18‬‬

‫ﺗﻌﻠﻢ‬



‫ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺎ ً( ﺳﺄﻗﻮﻡ ﺑﻌﺮﺽ ﻭﺍﻓﻲ ﻟﺠﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﺋﻨﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺤﺘﺎﺟﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺑﻨﺎء ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺠﻚ‬ ‫‪ .1‬ﺃﺫﻫﺐ ﻟﻠﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ ﻭﺃﺧﺘﺮ ) ‪ New‬ﺟﺪﻳﺪ (‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .2‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ‪.PB Object‬‬ ‫‪ .3‬ﺳﺘﻈﻬﺮ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻛﻤﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺸﻜﻞ ﺭﻗﻢ ) ‪ (3-9‬ﻻﺣﻆ ﺃﻥ ﺃﻫﻢ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﺋﻨﺎﺕ ﻛﻤﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺼﻨﺪﻭﻕ ﺍﻷﺣﻤﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺤﺘﺎﺟﻬﺎ‬ ‫ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻛﺒﻴﺮ ﻭﻣﺘﻜﺮﺭ‪ ،‬ﻭﺳﻨﺒﺪﺃ ﺑﺸﺮﺡ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﺋﻨﺎﺕ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﻔﺼﻞ‪:‬‬

‫ﺷﻜﻞ ﺭﻗﻢ )‪(3-8‬‬

‫ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ‪Window‬‬

‫‪.1‬‬ ‫‪.1‬‬ ‫‪.2‬‬ ‫‪.3‬‬ ‫‪.4‬‬ ‫‪.5‬‬

‫‪19‬‬

‫ﺃﺫﻫﺐ ﻟﻠﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ ﻭﺃﺧﺘﺮ ) ‪ New‬ﺟﺪﻳﺪ‬ ‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ‪.PB Object‬‬ ‫ﺳﺘﻈﻬﺮ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻛﻤﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺸﻜﻞ ﺭﻗﻢ )‪.(3-9‬‬ ‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻛﺎﺋﻦ ‪ Window‬ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺳﻴﻈﻬﺮ ﻛﺎﺋﻦ ‪ Window‬ﻛﻤﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺸﻜﻞ ﺭﻗﻢ )‪.(3-10‬‬ ‫(‪.‬‬

‫ﺗﻌﻠﻢ‬



‫ﺷﻜﻞ ﺭﻗﻢ )‪(3-9‬‬

‫ﺷﻜﻞ ﺭﻗﻢ )‪(3-10‬‬ ‫ﺳﺘﻼﺣﻆ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻣﻘﺴﻮﻣﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ 3‬ﺃﺟﺰﺍء ﻛﻤﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺸﻜﻞ ﺭﻗﻢ )‪ (3-10‬ﻭﻣﺮﻗﻤﺔ ﻣﻦ ‪ 1‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪3‬‬ ‫ﺭﻗﻢ ‪ 1‬ﻭﻫﻲ ﺟﺴﻢ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪20‬‬

‫ﺗﻌﻠﻢ‬



‫ﺭﻗﻢ ‪ 2‬ﺧﺼﺎﺋﺺ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻛﻤﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺸﻜﻞ ﺭﻗﻢ ) ‪ (3-11‬ﻭﺳﻨﺮﻛﺰ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺟﺰﺋﻴﺔ ‪ General‬ﻭﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﺼﻔﺢ ﺑﺎﻗﻲ ﺍﻟﺠﺰﺋﻴﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﻟﻮﺣﺪﻙ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‬ ‫‪Title‬‬ ‫‪Tag‬‬ ‫‪Menu Name‬‬ ‫‪Visible‬‬

‫ﻧﺺ ﻣﺴﺎﻋﺪﺓ ﻣﺨﺘﺼﺮ‬ ‫ﺍﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‬ ‫ﺇﻅﻬﺎﺭ‬

‫‪Enabled‬‬ ‫‪Control Menu‬‬

‫ﺗﻤﻜﻴﻦ‬

‫ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ‬

‫ﺗﻜﺒﻴﺮ‬

‫‪Max Box‬‬ ‫‪Min Box‬‬ ‫‪Client Edge‬‬ ‫‪Right To left‬‬ ‫‪Center‬‬ ‫‪Resizable‬‬

‫ﺣﻮﺍﻑ ﺃﺩﻕ‬ ‫ﺗﺤﻮﻳﻞ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻴﻤﻴﻦ ﻟﻠﻴﺴﺎﺭ‬ ‫ﻭﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻓﻲ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻘﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻠﻐﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺑﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﺗﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻮﺳﻂ‬ ‫ﻗﺎﺑﻠﻴﺔ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‬ ‫ﻧﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪:‬‬

‫ﺷﻜﻞ ﺭﻗﻢ )‪(3-11‬‬ ‫ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‬ ‫‪Window‬‬ ‫‪State‬‬

‫ﺗﺼﻐﻴﺮ‬

‫‪Child‬‬

‫‪Main‬‬

‫‪Window Type‬‬ ‫‪Mdi‬‬ ‫‪Mdi‬‬ ‫‪Help‬‬

‫‪Back‬‬ ‫‪color‬‬

‫‪Popup‬‬

‫‪Response‬‬

‫‪21‬‬

‫ﺍﺑﻦ ﺗﺎﺑﻊ ﺟﺰء ﻻ ﻳﺘﺠﺰﺃ ﻣﻦ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻋﺎﺩﻳﺔ ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻢ ﻓﺘﺤﻬﺎ‬ ‫ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ ‪ Open‬ﺳﺘﻜﻮﻥ ﻣﻔﺼﻮﻟﺔ‬ ‫ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﺗﻜﻮﻥ‬ ‫ﺗﺎﺑﻌﺔ ﻟﻠﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬ ‫ﺃﻣﺮ ‪.OpenSheet‬‬ ‫ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻬﺎ ﺿﻢ ﺃﻛﺜﺮ ﻣﻦ‬ ‫ﺷﺎﺷﺔ‪MultipleDocument ،‬‬ ‫‪Interface‬‬ ‫ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻧﻔﺲ ‪ Mdi‬ﻭﻓﻴﻬﺎ ﺷﺮﻳﻂ‬ ‫ﻣﺴﺎﻋﺪﺓ ﺃﺳﻔﻠﻬﺎ‬ ‫ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﻣﺜﻞ ﺻﻨﺪﻭﻕ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﻟﺔ‬ ‫ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺃﻱ ﻛﺎﺋﻦ ﺧﻠﻔﻬﺎ‬ ‫ﺇﻻ ﺑﺎﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺯﺭ ﻣﻨﻬﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﻣﺜﻞ ﺻﻨﺪﻭﻕ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﻟﺔ‬ ‫ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺃﻱ ﻛﺎﺋﻦ ﺧﻠﻔﻬﺎ‬ ‫ﺇﻻ ﺑﺎﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺯﺭ ﻣﻨﻬﺎ‪ ،‬ﻭﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺃﻥ‬ ‫ﺗﻤﺮﺭ ﻗﻴﻤﻪ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻟﻬﺎ‬

‫ﺗﻌﻠﻢ‬



‫ﺭﻗﻢ ‪ 3‬ﻣﻜﻮﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻛﻤﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺸﻜﻞ ﺭﻗﻢ )‪(3-10‬‬

‫‪1‬‬

‫‪Layout‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻤﻴﻢ‬

‫ﻫﻲ ﺟﺴﻢ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻨﺴﻴﻘﻬﺎ ﻭﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ‬ ‫ﻛﺎﺋﻨﺎﺕ ﻋﻠﻴﻬﺎ ﻣﺜﻞ‬ ‫ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ ﻭ ﻛﺎﺋﻨﺎﺕ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‬

‫‪2‬‬

‫ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ‬

‫ﻫﺬﻩ ﺟﺰﺋﻴﺔ ﻣﺘﻐﻴﺮﺓ‬ ‫ﺣﺴﺐ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭﻙ ﺇﻣﺎ‬ ‫ﻟﺤﺪﺙ)‪ (Event‬ﺃﻭ ﺩﺍﻟﺔ‬ ‫)‪ (Function‬ﺑﺤﻴﺚ‬ ‫ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﻓﻴﻬﺎ ﺍﺳﻢ ﺁﺧﺮ ﺷﻲ‬ ‫ﺗﻢ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻪ‬

‫‪3‬‬

‫‪Event‬‬ ‫ﺃﺣﺪﺍﺙ‬

‫ﻫﻲ ﺃﺣﺪﺍﺙ ﺗﺨﺺ ﻛﻞ‬ ‫ﻛﺎﺋﻦ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﻭﺿﻊ ﻛﻮﺩ‬ ‫ﺣﺴﺐ ﻣﺎ ﻳﻘﺘﻀﻴﻪ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻮﻗﻒ‬ ‫ﻣﺜﺎﻝ ﺣﺪﺙ)‪ (open‬ﻋﻨﺪ‬ ‫ﺩﺧﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻳﻨﻔﺬ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻜﻮﺩ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺪﺙ‬ ‫‪Open‬‬ ‫‪ Close‬ﺇﻏﻼﻕ ﻋﻨﺪ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺨﺮﻭﺝ ﻳﻨﻔﺬ ﺣﺪﺙ‬ ‫‪Close‬‬

‫‪22‬‬

‫ﺗﻌﻠﻢ‬

‫‪4‬‬

‫‪5‬‬

‫‪23‬‬


‫ﺑﻘﻠﻢ‪ :‬ﻣﺤﻤﺪ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺮﻱ‬ ‫ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﺪﻭﺍﻝ ﻣﺤﻠﻴﺔ‬ ‫‪ Local‬ﻭﻧﻄﺎﻕ‬ ‫ﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮﻫﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‬ ‫ﻭﺍﻟﻜﺎﺋﻨﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺗﺒﻄﺔ‬ ‫ﺑﻬﺎ‪ ،‬ﻭﻫﻲ ﻧﻮﻋﻴﻦ‪:‬‬ ‫• ﺩﻭﺍﻝ ﻣﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ‬ ‫‪Function‬‬ ‫ﻣﺴﺒﻘﺎً ﻛﺼﻔﺔ ﻓﻲ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻜﺎﺋﻦ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺩﻭﺍﻝ‬ ‫• ﺩﻭﺍﻝ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺃﻥ‬ ‫ﻳﻌﺮﻓﻬﺎ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ‪.‬‬ ‫ّ‬ ‫ﻭﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺃﻥ ﺗﻤﺮﺭ‬ ‫ﺃﻛﺜﺮ ﻣﻦ ﻣﺘﻐﻴﺮ‬ ‫ﻭﺗﺴﺘﻄﻴﻊ ﺇﺭﺟﺎﻉ‬ ‫ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ ﻓﻘﻂ‬ ‫ﺗﻌﺮﻳﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻐﻴﺮﺍﺕ‪:‬‬ ‫ﻭﺗﻌﺘﺒﺮ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻷﻣﻮﺭ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻬﻤﺔ ﺟﺪﺍً ﻓﻲ ﺑﺮﻣﺠﺔ‬ ‫‪ PB‬ﺃﻭ ﺃﻱ ﻟﻐﺔ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‬ ‫ﻭﻫﻲ ﺃﻧﻮﺍﻉ ﻳﺠﺐ ﺃﻥ‬ ‫ﺗﺴﺘﻮﻋﺒﻬﺎ‪:‬‬ ‫‪ Global .1‬ﻋﺎﻡ‪:‬‬ ‫ﻧﻄﺎﻕ ﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮﻩ ﻟﻜﻞ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻜﺎﺋﻨﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩ‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﺮﻭﻉ‪،‬‬ ‫ﻭﻳﺤﺘﻔﻆ ﺑﻘﻴﻤﺘﻪ ﻟﻜﻞ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﻭﻳﻔﻘﺪ‬ ‫ﻗﻴﻤﺘﻪ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﺨﺮﻭﺝ‬ ‫ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ‪.‬‬ ‫‪Declare‬‬ ‫‪ Shared .2‬ﻣﺸﺘﺮﻙ‬ ‫‪Variables‬‬ ‫ﻧﻄﺎﻕ ﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮﻩ ﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻜﺎﺋﻦ ﻭﻣﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺗﻪ‬ ‫ﻭﻳﺤﺘﻔﻆ ﺑﻘﻴﻤﺘﻪ‬ ‫ﺣﺘﻰ ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻢ ﺇﻏﻼﻕ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻜﺎﺋﻦ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ Instance .3‬ﺩﺍﺧﻠﻲ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻐﻴﺮ ﻣﺠﺎﻟﻪ ﻓﻘﻂ‬ ‫‪Event‬‬ ‫ﺩﺍﺧﻞ‬ ‫)ﺍﻟـﺤﺪﺙ( ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ‬ ‫ﺑﺎﻟـ ‪ Control‬ﺃﻭ‬ ‫)ﻋﻨﺼﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ(‬ ‫ﻭﻧﻄﺎﻕ ﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮﻩ ﻓﻲ‬ ‫ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﺤﺪﺙ‬ ‫‪event‬‬

‫ﺗﻌﻠﻢ‬



‫‪Menu‬‬

‫‪.2‬‬ ‫‪.1‬‬ ‫‪.2‬‬ ‫‪.3‬‬ ‫‪.4‬‬ ‫‪.5‬‬

‫ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‬

‫ﺃﺫﻫﺐ ﻟﻠﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ ﻭﺃﺧﺘﺮ ) ‪ New‬ﺟﺪﻳﺪ‬ ‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ‪.PB Object‬‬ ‫ﺳﺘﻈﻬﺮ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻛﻤﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺷﻜﻞ ﺭﻗﻢ )‪.(3-11‬‬ ‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻛﺎﺋﻦ ‪ Menu‬ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺳﻴﻈﻬﺮ ﻛﺎﺋﻦ ‪ Menu‬ﻛﻤﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺸﻜﻞ ﺭﻗﻢ )‪.(3-12‬‬ ‫(‪.‬‬

‫ﺷﻜﻞ ﺭﻗﻢ )‪(3-11‬‬

‫ﺷﻜﻞ ﺭﻗﻢ )‪(3-12‬‬ ‫‪24‬‬

‫ﺗﻌﻠﻢ‬


‫ﺑﻘﻠﻢ‪ :‬ﻣﺤﻤﺪ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺮﻱ‬ ‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﺑﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﻜﻞ ﺷﺠﺮﺓ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ‬ ‫ﺗﻔﺮﻳﻊ ﺃﻛﺜﺮ ﻣﻦ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﻭﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﻧﻘﻞ ﺟﺰﺋﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﺗﺤﺖ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﺃﻭ ﺟﻌﻠﻬﺎ ﺭﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ ﺍﻧﻈﺮ ﺍﻟﺸﻜﻞ‬ ‫ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ‪،‬‬ ‫• ﻗﻢ ﺑﻨﻘﺮ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ﺍﻷﻳﻤﻦ ﻟﻠﻔﺄﺭﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫‪ Untitled‬ﺳﺘﻈﻬﺮ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻣﻨﺒﺜﻘﺔ‬ ‫• ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ‪Insert Submenu‬‬ ‫‪.Item‬‬ ‫• ﺛﻢ ﻗﻢ ﺑﻜﺘﺎﺑﺔ ﺍﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ‪.‬‬

‫‪1‬‬

‫ﺑﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‬

‫‪2‬‬

‫ﻣﻌﺎﻳﻨﺔ‬ ‫ﻟﻠﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‬

‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﺓ ﻣﻌﺎﻳﻨﺔ ﻟﻠﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‬

‫‪3‬‬

‫ﺍﻷﺣﺪﺍﺙ‬ ‫‪events‬‬

‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﻛﺘﺎﺑﺔ )ﺍﻟﻜﻮﺩ( ﻓﻲ ﺍﻷﺣﺪﺍﺙ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ‬ ‫ﺗﺨﺺ ﻋﻨﺎﺻﺮ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‬

‫‪25‬‬

‫ﺗﻌﻠﻢ‬

‫‪4‬‬


‫ﺑﻘﻠﻢ‪ :‬ﻣﺤﻤﺪ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺮﻱ‬ ‫‪Name‬‬

‫ﺍﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﺼﺮ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‬ ‫ﻭﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺤﺴﻦ ﺃﻥ ﻳﺒﺪﺃ‬ ‫ﺍﻻﺳﻢ ﺑـ)‪(m‬‬

‫‪Lock Name‬‬

‫ﺇﻗﻔﺎﻝ ﺣﻘﻞ ﺍﻟـ‪Name‬‬

‫‪Text‬‬

‫ﺍﻟﻨﺺ‬

‫‪Micro Help‬‬

‫ﻣﺴﺎﻋﺪﺓ ﺻﻐﻴﺮﺓ ﻋﻨﺪ‬ ‫ﻣﺮﻭﺭ ﻣﺆﺷﺮ ﺍﻟﻔﺄﺭﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻌﻨﺼﺮ ﻳﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﻟﻨﺺ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺘﻮﺏ‬

‫ﺍﻟﺨﺼﺎﺋﺺ‬

‫‪Visible‬‬

‫ﺇﻅﻬﺎﺭ‪/‬ﺇﺧﻔﺎء‬

‫‪General‬‬

‫‪Enabled‬‬

‫ﺗﻤﻜﻴﻦ‪/‬ﺣﻈﺮ‬

‫‪Checked‬‬

‫ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ )ﺻﺢ(‬ ‫ﺑﺠﺎﻧﺐ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﺼﺮ‬

‫‪Default‬‬

‫ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﺼﺮ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ‬ ‫ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬

‫‪ShiftToRight‬‬

‫ﺗﺤﻮﻳﻞ ﺍﺗﺠﺎﻩ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‬ ‫ﻟﻠﻴﻤﻴﻦ ﻭﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻓﻲ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻘﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺑﻴﺔ‬

‫‪Shortcut Key‬‬

‫‪Toolbar Item‬‬ ‫‪Text‬‬ ‫‪Toolbar Item‬‬ ‫‪Name‬‬

‫‪4‬‬

‫ﺍﻟﺨﺼﺎﺋﺺ‬ ‫‪Toolbar‬‬

‫‪Toolbar Item‬‬ ‫‪Down Name‬‬ ‫‪Toolbar Item‬‬ ‫‪Visible‬‬ ‫‪Toolbar Item‬‬ ‫‪Space‬‬ ‫‪Toolbar Item‬‬ ‫‪Order‬‬

‫‪26‬‬

‫ﻋﻤﻞ ﺍﺧﺘﺼﺎﺭ ﻣﺜﺎﻝ‬ ‫‪CTRL+A‬‬ ‫ﻣﺴﻤﻰ ﻋﻨﺼﺮ ﻣﻮﺟﻮﺩ‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ﺷﺮﻳﻂ ﺍﻷﺩﻭﺍﺕ‬ ‫ﺗﺨﺘﺎﺭ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻣﻦ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‬ ‫ﺗﺨﺘﺎﺭ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻟﻌﻨﺼﺮ ﻓﻲ‬ ‫ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻷﺩﻭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺴﺪﻟﺔ‬ ‫ﺇﻅﻬﺎﺭ‪/‬ﺇﺧﻔﺎء‬ ‫ﺗﺤﺪﺩ ﻣﺴﺎﻓﺔ ﻓﺎﺭﻏﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫ﺷﺮﻳﻂ ﺍﻷﺩﻭﺍﺕ ﺗﺴﺒﻖ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻌﻨﺼﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﺤﺪﺩ ﺭﻗﻢ ﺗﺴﻠﺴﻠﻲ‬ ‫ﻟﺘﺮﺗﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﺎﺻﺮ ﻓﻲ‬ ‫ﺷﺮﻳﻂ ﺍﻷﺩﻭﺍﺕ‬

‫ﺗﻌﻠﻢ‬



‫‪ Structure‬ﺍﻟﻬﻴﻜﻞ‬

‫‪.3‬‬

‫ﺍﻟﻬﻴﻜﻞ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﺋﻨﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟـ ‪ PB‬ﻭﺗﺴﺘﻄﻴﻊ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻬﺎ ﺑﻜﺜﺮﺓ ﻟﻨﻘﻞ ﻭﺗﻤﺮﻳﺮ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻭﺍﺳﺘﻘﺒﺎﻟﻬﺎ‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ﻣﻜﺎﻥ ﺁﺧﺮ ﺩﻓﻌﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ‪ ،‬ﻭﻟﺒﻨﺎء ﻫﻴﻜﻞ ﺟﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﺗﺒﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﻠﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ‪:‬‬ ‫‪.1‬‬ ‫‪.2‬‬ ‫‪.3‬‬ ‫‪.4‬‬ ‫‪.5‬‬

‫ﺃﺫﻫﺐ ﻟﻠﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ ﻭﺃﺧﺘﺮ ) ‪ New‬ﺟﺪﻳﺪ‬ ‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ‪.PB Object‬‬ ‫ﺳﺘﻈﻬﺮ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻛﻤﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺷﻜﻞ ﺭﻗﻢ )‪.(3-13‬‬ ‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻛﺎﺋﻦ ‪ Structure‬ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺳﻴﻈﻬﺮ ﻛﺎﺋﻦ ‪ Structure‬ﻛﻤﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺸﻜﻞ ﺭﻗﻢ )‪.(3-14‬‬ ‫(‪.‬‬

‫ﺷﻜﻞ ﺭﻗﻢ )‪(3-13‬‬

‫ﺷﻜﻞ ﺭﻗﻢ )‪(3-14‬‬ ‫ﺑﺈﻣﻜﺎﻧﻚ ﺃﻥ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺈﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﻋﺪﺓ ﺃﺳﻄﺮ ﻭﺗﺴﻤﻲ ﻣﺘﻐﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﻭﺃﻧﻮﺍﻉ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻔﺔ ﺣﺴﺐ ﻣﺎ ﺗﻘﺘﻀﻴﻪ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﺟﺔ ﻛﻤﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺸﻜﻞ ﺭﻗﻢ‬ ‫)‪ ،(3-14‬ﻭﺳﻨﺘﻌﺮﻑ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻬﻴﻜﻞ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﻮﺩ ﻭﻛﻴﻒ ﻧﺮﺳﻠﻪ ﻭﻛﻴﻒ ﻧﺴﺘﻘﺒﻠﻪ ﻋﻦ ﻁﺮﻳﻖ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﺋﻦ ‪Message‬‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻔﺼﻞ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﻣﺲ‪.‬‬ ‫‪27‬‬

‫ﺗﻌﻠﻢ‬

‫‪.4‬‬



‫‪ Function‬ﺍﻟﺪﺍﻟﺔ‬

‫ﻛﺎﺋﻦ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﻟﺔ ﻳﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ ﻓﻲ ﺃﻱ ﻟﻐﺔ ﺑﺮﻣﺠﺔ ﻟﻤﺎ ﻟﻪ ﻣﻦ ﻓﻮﺍﺋﺪ ﻛﺜﻴﺮﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻞ ﻭﺟﻌﻠﻪ ﻣﺮﻛﺰﻳﺎً‪ ،‬ﻭﻟﺘﻮﺿﻴﺢ ﺫﻟﻚ ﺃﻧﻈﺮ ﺍﻟﺸﻜﻞ ﺭﻗﻢ‬ ‫)‪ (3-15‬ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﻮﺿﺢ ﺍﻟﻔﺮﻕ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺗﻜﺮﺍﺭ ﻣﺤﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﻟﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺃﺟﺰﺍء ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻔﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﻭﺑﻴﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺪﻋﺎء ﺍﻟﺪﺍﻟﺔ ﻭﻣﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺗﻬﺎ ﻟﻜﻲ ﺗﻨﻔﺬ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻞ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺏ ﻣﻨﻬﺎ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﺮﻛﺰﻱ‪.‬‬

‫ﺍﻟﻄﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﻠﻴﺪﻳﺔ ﻧﺸﺮ ﺍﻟﻜﻮﺩ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺴﻠﺒﻴﺎﺕ‪:‬‬ ‫‪ .1‬ﺍﺳﺘﻬﻼﻙ ﻭﻗﺖ ﻛﺒﻴﺮ ﻓﻲ ﻧﺴﺦ ﻭ ﻟﺼﻖ ﺍﻟﻜﻮﺩ ﻓﻲ‬ ‫ﺃﺭﺟﺎء ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﻭﺍﺣﺘﻤﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺍﺭﺗﻜﺎﺏ ﺃﺧﻄﺎء ﻛﺜﻴﺮﺓ‬ ‫ﻭﺧﺎﺻﺔ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺿﺨﻤﺎ ً‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .2‬ﺻﻌﻮﺑﺔ ﻣﻌﺮﻓﺔ ﻋﻤﻞ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻜﻮﺩ ﻭﻣﺎ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﻢ‬ ‫ﺇﻧﺸﺎﺋﻪ ﻟﻪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .3‬ﺻﻌﻮﺑﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺪﻳﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻜﻮﺩ ﺃﻭ ﺣﺬﻓﻪ ﻟﺘﻨﺎﺛﺮﻩ ﻓﻲ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻌﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺃﻣﺎﻛﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ‪.‬‬ ‫‪28‬‬

‫ﺍﻟﻄﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﺍﻷﻣﺜﻞ ﻟﺘﺠﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﻜﻮﺩ ﻓﻲ ﺩﺍﻟﺔ ﻭﺍﺳﺘﺪﻋﺎﺋﻬﺎ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﺟﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻹﻳﺠﺎﺑﻴﺎﺕ‪:‬‬ ‫‪ .1‬ﻛﺘﺎﺑﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﻮﺩ ﻣﺮﺓ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ ﻓﻘﻂ ﻭﺣﻔﻈﻪ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﺩﺍﻟﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .2‬ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﺳﺘﺪﻋﺎء ﺍﻟﺪﺍﻟﺔ ﺑﺄﻣﺎﻥ ﺩﻭﻥ ﺍﺭﺗﻜﺎﺏ ﺃﺧﻄﺎء ﻓﻲ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻌﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺃﺭﺟﺎء ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﻭﺣﺘﻰ ﻟﻮ ﻛﺎﻥ ﺿﺨﻤﺎ ً‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .3‬ﺳﻬﻮﻟﺔ ﺗﺘﺒﻊ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﻟﺔ ﺑﻤﺠﺮﺩ ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺮ ﻟﻤﻌﺮﻓﺔ ﺳﺒﺐ ﺍﺳﺘﺪﻋﺎﺋﻬﺎ‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ﺃﻱ ﺟﺰء ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .4‬ﺳﻬﻮﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺪﻳﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻜﻮﺩ ﻟﻜﻮﻧﻪ ﻣﺮﻛﺰﻳﺎ ً ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﻟﺔ‪،‬‬ ‫ﻭﺳﻴﺆﺛﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺇﺳﺘﺪﻋﺎءﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﻟﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺃﻧﺤﺎء ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ‪.‬‬

‫ﺗﻌﻠﻢ‬

‫‪.5‬‬



‫‪ Custom Class‬ﻛﺎﺋﻨﺎﺕ ﻣﺨﺼﺼﺔ‬

‫ﻭﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﺋﻦ ﻳﺘﻴﺢ ﻟﻚ ﺇﻧﺸﺎء ﻛﺎﺋﻦ ﻣﺮﺋﻲ ﺃﻭ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﺮﺋﻲ ﻣﺨﺼﺺ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﻭﻅﻴﻔﺔ ﻣﻌﻴﻨﺔ ﺑﺤﻴﺚ ﻳﺼﺒﺢ ﻣﻮﺟﻮﺩﺍً ﻭﺗﺴﺘﻄﻴﻊ‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻪ ﻣﺘﻰ ﺷﺌﺖ ﺑﺤﻴﺚ ﻳﺤﺘﻮﻱ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﺣﺪﺍﺙ‪ events‬ﻭﺩﻭﺍﻝ ‪ ،Functions‬ﻭﻹﻧﺸﺎﺋﻪ ﺍﺗﺒﻊ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪:‬‬ ‫‪ .1‬ﺃﺫﻫﺐ ﻟﻠﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ ﻭﺃﺧﺘﺮ ) ‪ New‬ﺟﺪﻳﺪ (‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .2‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ‪.PB Object‬‬ ‫‪ .3‬ﺳﺘﻈﻬﺮ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻛﻤﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺷﻜﻞ ﺭﻗﻢ )‪.(3-14‬‬ ‫‪ .4‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻛﺎﺋﻦ ‪ Custom Class‬ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .5‬ﺳﻴﻈﻬﺮ ﻛﺎﺋﻦ ‪ Custom Class‬ﻛﻤﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺸﻜﻞ ﺭﻗﻢ )‪.(3-15‬‬

‫ﺷﻜﻞ ﺭﻗﻢ )‪(3-14‬‬

‫‪29‬‬

‫ﺗﻌﻠﻢ‬



‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺑﻨﺎء ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﺋﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺼﺺ ﺍﻟﻐﻴﺮ ﻣﺮﺋﻲ ﻭﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﻛﻮﺩ ﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫ﺍﻷﺣﺪﺍﺙ ‪ events‬ﺃﻭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺪﻭﺍﻝ ﺃﻭ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺩﻭﺍﻝ ﺟﺪﻳﺪﺓ‪.‬‬

‫‪3‬‬

‫‪Custom Class‬‬ ‫ﻛﺎﺋﻦ ﻣﺨﺼﺺ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﺮﺋﻲ‬

‫‪4‬‬

‫‪Standard Class‬‬ ‫ﻛﺎﺋﻦ ﻗﻴﺎﺳﻲ ﻣﺨﺼﺺ ﻏﻴﺮ‬ ‫ﻣﺮﺋﻲ‬

‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺑﻨﺎء ﻛﺎﺋﻦ ﻣﺨﺼﺺ ﻳﺄﺧﺬ ﺻﻔﺎﺗﻪ ﻣﻦ ﻛﺎﺋﻨﺎﺕ ﻗﻴﺎﺳﻴﺔ ﻣﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ‬ ‫ﺃﺻﻼً ﻓﻲ ﻟﻐﺔ ‪.PB‬‬

‫‪30‬‬

‫ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺎﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺃﻱ ﻛﺎﺋﻦ ﻗﻴﺎﺳﻲ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺛﻢ ﺗﻜﻤﻞ ﺑﺎﻗﻲ ﺍﻹﺟﺮﺍءﺍﺕ‬ ‫ﻛﻤﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺸﻜﻞ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ‪.‬‬

‫ﺗﻌﻠﻢ‬


‫ﺑﻘﻠﻢ‪ :‬ﻣﺤﻤﺪ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺮﻱ‬ ‫ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻹﻣﻜﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﻗﻮﻳﺔ ﺟﺪﺍً ﺑﺤﻴﺚ ﺗﺴﺘﻄﻴﻊ ﺇﻧﺸﺎء ﻛﺎﺋﻦ ﻣﺨﺼﺺ ﻭﻣﺮﺋﻲ‬ ‫ﺑﻨﻔﺲ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ‪.‬‬

‫‪5‬‬

‫‪Custom Visual‬‬ ‫ﻛﺎﺋﻦ ﻣﺮﺋﻲ ﻣﺨﺼﺺ‬

‫‪6‬‬

‫‪External Visual‬‬ ‫ﻛﺎﺋﻦ ﻣﺮﺋﻲ ﺧﺎﺭﺟﻲ‬

‫ﻭﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺷﻲء ﻣﻦ ﺍﻷﺩﻭﺍﺕ ﻣﺜﻞ )ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺍﺋﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺴﺪﻟﺔ‪(..،‬‬

‫ﻭﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﺋﻦ ﺗﺴﺘﻄﻴﻊ ﺇﻧﺸﺎﺋﻪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺪﻋﺎء ﻣﻠﻒ‬ ‫ﻛﺎﺋﻦ ﻣﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﻓﻴﻪ ‪ Class‬ﻟﻜﻲ ﻳﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﻨﻔﺲ ﻋﻤﻠﻪ‪.‬‬

‫‪31‬‬

‫‪ *.DLL‬ﻭﺗﺴﻤﻴﺔ‬

‫ﺗﻌﻠﻢ‬


‫ﺑﻘﻠﻢ‪ :‬ﻣﺤﻤﺪ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺮﻱ‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺑﻨﺎء ﻛﺎﺋﻦ ﻣﺨﺼﺺ ﻣﺮﺋﻲ ﻳﺄﺧﺬ ﺻﻔﺎﺗﻪ ﻣﻦ ﻛﺎﺋﻨﺎﺕ ﻗﻴﺎﺳﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﻣﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺃﺻﻼً ﻓﻲ ﻟﻐﺔ ‪.PB‬‬

‫‪7‬‬

‫‪Standard Visual‬‬ ‫ﻛﺎﺋﻦ ﻣﺮﺋﻲ ﻗﻴﺎﺳﻲ‬

‫ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺎﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺃﻱ ﻛﺎﺋﻦ ﻗﻴﺎﺳﻲ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺛﻢ ﺗﻜﻤﻞ ﺑﺎﻗﻲ ﺍﻹﺟﺮﺍءﺍﺕ‬ ‫ﻛﻤﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺸﻜﻞ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ‪ ،‬ﻭﻋﻠﻰ ﺳﺒﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺜﺎﻝ ﻧﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺎﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ‬ ‫‪ CommandButton‬ﻻﺣﻆ ﺍﻟﺸﻜﻞ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ‪ ،‬ﺳﺘﻼﺣﻆ ﺑﺄﻧﻚ ﻻ ﺗﺴﺘﻄﻴﻊ‬ ‫ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺃﻱ ﺃﺩﺍﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﻜﻞ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﻲ ﻓﻘﻂ ﺳﻴﺄﺧﺬ ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻴﺔ ﻟﻸﺩﺍﺓ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﺳﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺍﺧﺘﺮﺗﻬﺎ‪.‬‬

‫ﻛﻴﻒ ﺗﺴﺘﺪﻋﻲ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﺋﻨﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺼﺼﺔ ﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ؟‬ ‫ﻫﻨﺎﻙ ﻁﺮﻳﻘﺘﺎﻥ ﻟﻼﺳﺘﺪﻋﺎء ﺍﻟﻜﺎﺋﻨﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺼﺼﺔ‪:‬‬ ‫‪ .1‬ﺍﺳﺘﺪﻋﺎء ﺍﻟﻜﺎﺋﻨﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻐﻴﺮ ﻣﺮﺋﻴﺔ ﻭﺗﻔﻌﻴﻠﻬﺎ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻜﻮﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .2‬ﺍﺳﺘﺪﻋﺎء ﺍﻟﻜﺎﺋﻨﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺼﺼﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺋﻴﺔ ﻭﺗﻔﻌﻴﻠﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﺗﺒﻊ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪:‬‬ ‫• ﺍﻓﺘﺢ ﺃﻭ ﻗﻢ ﺑﺈﻧﺸﺎء ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺟﺪﻳﺪﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺛﻢ ﺍﺫﻫﺐ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻷﺩﻭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ ﻛﻤﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺸﻜﻞ ﺭﻗﻢ )‪ (3-15‬ﻭﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ‪Create‬‬ ‫‪.User Object Control‬‬ ‫• ﺳﺘﻈﻬﺮ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻛﻤﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺸﻜﻞ ﺭﻗﻢ )‪ (3-16‬ﻭﻓﻴﻬﺎ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﺋﻨﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺼﺼﺔ ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺃﺣﺪﻫﺎ ﺣﺴﺐ ﺣﺎﺟﺘﻚ‬ ‫• ﻗﻢ ﺑﺈﺩﺭﺍﺟﻪ ﺑﺎﻟﻨﻘﺮ ﺑﺰﺭ ﺍﻟﻔﺄﺭﺓ ﺍﻷﻳﺴﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺳﻴﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﺋﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺼﺺ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻛﻤﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺸﻜﻞ ﺭﻗﻢ‬ ‫)‪.(3-17‬‬

‫‪32‬‬

‫ﺗﻌﻠﻢ‬



‫ﺷﻜﻞ ﺭﻗﻢ )‪(3-15‬‬

‫ﺷﻜﻞ ﺭﻗﻢ )‪(3-16‬‬ ‫‪33‬‬

‫ﺗﻌﻠﻢ‬



‫ﺷﻜﻞ ﺭﻗﻢ )‪(3-17‬‬

‫ﺛﺎﻟﺜﺎ ً( ‪ DataWindow Object‬ﻛﺎﺋﻦ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ‪:‬‬ ‫ﺳﺮ ﻗﻮﺓ‬ ‫ﺳﺄﻗﻮﻡ ﺑﻌﺮﺽ ﻭﺍﻓﻲ ﻟﺠﻤﻴﻊ ﻛﺎﺋﻨﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻭﻫﻲ ﺗﺴﻤﻰ ‪ DataWindow‬ﺃﻭ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ‪ ،‬ﻳﻌﺘﺒﺮ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﺋﻦ ّ‬ ‫ﻟﻐﺔ ﺍﻟـ ‪ PB‬ﺑﻤﺎ ﺗﻌﻨﻴﻪ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻜﻠﻤﺔ ﻣﻦ ﻣﻌﻨﻰ ﻭﺃﺳﺎﺱ ﺍﺣﺘﺮﺍﻓﻚ ﻟﻬﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻠﻐﺔ ﻫﻮ ﺇﺗﻘﺎﻥ ﻓﻬﻢ ﻭﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻭﺗﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﺋﻨﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﻭﺩﻣﺠﻬﺎ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻓﻬﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﺋﻨﺎﺕ ﺳﻬﻠﺔ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻭﻏﻨﻴﺔ ﺑﺎﻷﺩﻭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻌﻄﻴﻚ ﻣﺴﺎﺣﺔ ﺗﺤﻜﻢ ﺃﻛﺒﺮ ﺑﻄﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﺑﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻭﻋﺮﺿﻬﺎ ﻭﺣﺘﻰ‬ ‫ﻁﺒﺎﻋﺘﻬﺎ ﻭﺇﺩﺧﺎﻟﻬﺎ‪ ،‬ﻟﻮ ﺭﺟﻌﻨﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﺎﺿﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﻳﺐ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﻗﻮﺍﻋﺪ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺒﻴﺮﺓ ﻣﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺭﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ ‪ Frame‬ﺃﻭ‬ ‫‪ Sun‬ﻭﻛﺎﻥ ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻫﻮ ‪ Unix‬ﻭﻳﻘﺒﻞ ﻗﻮﺍﻋﺪ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻣﺜﻞ ﺍﻟـ ‪ Oracle‬ﻭﻟﻘﺪ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺈﺩﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﺗﻌﺮﻑ ﺑﺎﺳﻢ ‪ (Structured Query Language ) SQL Statement‬ﻭﻗﺪ ﺗﻢ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻠﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ‪ ANSI‬ﻭ ‪ ISO‬ﻛﻠﻐﺔ‬ ‫ﻗﻴﺎﺳﻴﺔ ﻭﻣﻨﻬﺠﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻭﺗﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻠﻐﺔ ﻣﻦ ﻋﻤﻞ ﺍﻹﺟﺮﺍءﺍﺕ ﺍﻻﻋﺘﻴﺎﺩﻳﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻗﺎﻋﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻣﻦ )ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ‪ ،‬ﺣﺬﻑ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ‪ ،‬ﺣﻔﻆ‬ ‫‪SQL‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ‪ ،‬ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻌﻼﻡ‪ ،‬ﻭﺇﻧﺸﺎء ﺣﺬﻑ ﺗﻌﺪﻳﻞ ﺟﺪﻭﻝ‪ ،(... ،‬ﻓﺄﺳﺎﺱ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺎﻣﻞ ﻣﻊ ﻗﻮﺍﻋﺪ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﻋﻦ ﻁﺮﻳﻖ‬ ‫‪ SQL‬ﻫﻲ ﺃﺳﺎﺱ‬ ‫‪ Statement‬ﻭﺇﻟﻰ ﻳﻮﻣﻨﺎ ﻫﺬﺍ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﻄﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺋﻞ ﻓﻲ ﻟﻐﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻣﺠﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺎﺻﺮﺓ ﻭﺇﻣﻜﺎﻧﻴﺎﺗﻬﺎ ﺇﻻ ﺇﻥ‬ ‫‪ SQL Statement‬ﺑﺸﻜﻞ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺎﻣﻞ ﻣﻊ ﻗﻮﺍﻋﺪ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻭﻟﻜﻦ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻳﺤﻤﻞ ﺻﺒﻐﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻄﻮﺭ ﺃﻱ ﺃﻧﻚ ﺗﺴﺘﻄﻴﻊ ﺑﻨﺎء ﺟﻤﻠﺔ‬ ‫ﻣﺮﺋﻲ ﺩﻭﻥ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﺟﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻛﺘﺎﺑﺔ ﺷﻲ ﻳﺬﻛﺮ ﻭﻫﺬﺍ ﻳﺴﻤﻰ ‪.SQL Editor‬‬ ‫ﻓﺘﻌﺘﺒﺮ ‪ Data Window Object‬ﻋﺒﺎﺭﺓ ﻋﻦ ﺟﻤﻠﺔ ‪ Select SQL Statement‬ﻭﻟﻜﻦ ﻣﺮﺋﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﻳﺴﺎﻭﻳﻬﺎ ﺟﻤﻠﺔ‬ ‫‪ SQL‬ﺗﺴﺘﻄﻴﻊ ﺍﺳﺘﻌﺮﺍﺿﻬﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫‪34‬‬

‫ﺗﻌﻠﻢ‬



‫‪ .1‬ﺃﺫﻫﺐ ﻟﻠﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ ﻭﺃﺧﺘﺮ ) ‪ New‬ﺟﺪﻳﺪ‬ ‫‪ .2‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ‪.Data Window‬‬ ‫‪ .3‬ﺳﺘﻈﻬﺮ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻛﻤﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺸﻜﻞ ﺭﻗﻢ ) ‪ (3-18‬ﻻﺣﻆ ﺃﻥ ﺃﻫﻢ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﺋﻨﺎﺕ ﻛﻤﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺼﻨﺪﻭﻕ ﺍﻷﺣﻤﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺤﺘﺎﺟﻬﺎ‬ ‫ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻛﺒﻴﺮ ﻭﻣﺘﻜﺮﺭ‪ ،‬ﻭﺳﻨﺒﺪﺃ ﺑﺸﺮﺡ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﺋﻨﺎﺕ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﻔﺼﻞ‪:‬‬ ‫(‪.‬‬

‫ﺷﻜﻞ ﺭﻗﻢ )‪(3-18‬‬ ‫‪ .4‬ﻹﻧﺸﺎء ﺃﻱ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ‪ Data window‬ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺸﻜﻞ ﺃﻋﻼﻩ ﻫﻨﺎﻙ ﺧﻄﻮﺍﺕ ﻣﺸﺘﺮﻛﺔ ﻳﺠﺐ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻭﺭ ﺑﻬﺎ ﻋﻨﺪ‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺃﻱ ﻧﻮﻉ ﻣﻦ ﺃﻧﻮﺍﻉ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻛﻤﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺸﻜﻞ )‪ (3-18‬ﻭﺳﺄﺷﺮﺣﻬﺎ ﺍﻵﻥ ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺃﻱ ﻣﻦ ﺷﺎﺷﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻛﻤﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺸﻜﻞ )‪ (3-18‬ﺳﺘﻈﻬﺮ ﻟﻚ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪:‬‬

‫‪35‬‬

‫ﺗﻌﻠﻢ‬



‫ﺳﺘﻼﺣﻆ ﺃﻧﻪ ﻫﻨﺎﻙ ﺃﻛﺜﺮ ﻣﻦ ﻁﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺑﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺠﺪﺍﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﻗﺎﻋﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺃﻱ‬ ‫ﻁﺮﻳﻘﻪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻄﺮﻕ ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺯﺭ ‪NEXT‬‬ ‫ﺳﺘﻈﻬﺮ ﻟﻚ‬ ‫ﺃﺳﻤﺎء ﺟﻤﻴﻊ‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ﻗﺎﻋﺪﺓ‬ ‫ﺣﺎﻟﻴﺎً‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ‬ ‫ﺃﻛﺜﺮ ﻭﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫ﺑﺎﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺟﺪﻭﻝ‬

‫‪1‬‬

‫ﺳﺘﻈﻬﺮ ﻟﻚ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻭﺗﺤﺘﻮﻱ‬ ‫ﻣﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﻢ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭﻩ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺑﻘﺔ ﻗﻢ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺤﻘﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺑﺔ‬ ‫ﺑﺈﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻣﻦ‬ ‫ﺍﻷﺩﻭﺍﺕ‬ ‫ﻓﻴﻘﻮﻡ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺤﻘﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻤﻴﻢ ﻹﻧﻬﺎء‬

‫ﻭﻓﻲ ﻣﺎ ﻳﻠﻲ ﺗﻔﺼﻴﻞ ﻭﻭﻅﻴﻔﺔ ﻛﻞ ﻁﺮﻳﻘﺔ‬ ‫ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻓﺮﻋﻴﺔ ﻓﻴﻬﺎ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺠﺪﺍﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺼﻠﺔ‬ ‫ﺑﺎﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺟﺪﻭﻝ ﺃﻭ‬ ‫ﺳﺒﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺜﺎﻝ ﻗﻢ‬ ‫‪t_man_job‬‬

‫ﺷﺎﺷﺔ‬ ‫ﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺠﺪﻭﻝ‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ‬ ‫ﺑﺈﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ‬ ‫ﺛﻢ ﻗﻢ‬ ‫ﺷﺮﻳﻂ‬ ‫‪Return‬‬ ‫ﺑﺈﺭﺟﺎﻉ‬ ‫ﺷﺎﺷﺔ‬ ‫ﺗﺼﻤﻴﻤﻬﺎ‬

‫ﺳﺘﻼﺣﻆ ﺃﻥ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻄﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﻋﺒﺎﺭﺓ ﻋﻦ ‪ SQL Select Statement‬ﻣﺮﺋﻴﺔ ﻭﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﺓ‬ ‫ﺍﻹﻣﻜﺎﻧﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻛﻤﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺸﻜﻞ ﺃﻋﻼﻩ‪:‬‬ ‫• ‪ Syntax‬ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﺓ ﺻﻴﻐﺔ ‪.SQL Statement‬‬ ‫• ‪ Sort‬ﺗﺮﺗﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ‪.‬‬ ‫• ‪ Where‬ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺷﺮﻭﻁ ﻣﺤﺪﺩﺓ ﻹﻅﻬﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺑﺸﺮﻭﻁ ﻣﺤﺪﺩﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫• ‪ Group‬ﺗﺠﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ‪.‬‬ ‫• ‪ Having‬ﻟﺘﺮﺗﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﻤﻮﻋﺎﺕ‪.‬‬ ‫• ‪ Compute‬ﻋﻤﻞ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﻣﺤﺎﺳﺒﻴﺔ‪.‬‬

‫‪36‬‬

‫ﺗﻌﻠﻢ‬



‫ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺳﺮﻳﻊ ﻟﻠﺠﺪﻭﻝ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺠﺪﺍﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺑﺔ ﺃﻧﻈﺮ ﺍﻟﺸﻜﻞ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ‪:‬‬

‫‪2‬‬ ‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺈﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺠﺪﻭﻝ ‪ t_man_job‬ﺍﻧﻈﺮ ﺍﻟﺸﻜﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ‬

‫‪37‬‬

‫ﺗﻌﻠﻢ‬



‫ﺑﺈﻣﻜﺎﻧﻚ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ‪ Query‬ﻣﺨﺰﻧﺔ ﺃﺻﻼ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺃﻭ ﻛﺘﺎﺑﺘﻬﺎ ﻳﺪﻭﻳﺎ ً ﻟﺘﺤﻮﻳﻠﻬﺎ ﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‬ ‫ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻧﻈﺮ ﺍﻟﺸﻜﻞ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ‪:‬‬

‫‪3‬‬

‫ﻭﻫﻲ ﻣﻴﺰﺓ ﻗﻮﻳﺔ ﺟﺪﺍً ﻓﻲ ﻟﻐﺔ ﺍﻟـ ‪ PB‬ﺗﺴﺘﻄﻴﻊ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻟﻬﺎ ﺃﻥ ﺗﺒﻨﻲ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺧﺎﺭﺟﻴﺔ ﺃﻱ‬ ‫ﻟﻴﺴﺖ ﻣﺮﺗﺒﻄﺔ ﺑﺄﻱ ﺟﺪﻭﻝ ﻧﻬﺎﺋﻴﺎ ً ﺇﻧﻤﺎ ﻫﻲ ﺣﻘﻮﻝ ﻭﻫﻤﻴﺔ ﻻ ﺗﺼﻠﺢ ﻟﺘﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﻓﻘﻂ‬ ‫ﺃﻥ ﺗﻜﺘﺐ ﻓﻴﻬﺎ ﻭﺗﻌﺮﺽ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺗﻚ ﻓﻴﻬﺎ ﻭﻫﻲ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺃﻛﺜﺮ ﺷﻲء ﻓﻲ ﺷﺎﺷﺎﺕ ﺷﺮﻭﻁ ﺍﻟﺒﺤﺚ‪،‬‬ ‫ﻭﻣﻴﺰﺗﻬﺎ ﺃﻥ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﺤﻘﻮﻝ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﻋﻠﻴﻬﺎ ﺧﺼﺎﺋﺺ ﻭﺩﻭﺍﻝ ﻭﺇﺟﺮﺍءﺍﺕ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ‪:‬‬

‫‪4‬‬

‫ﺑﺈﻣﻜﺎﻧﻚ ﺗﻐﺬﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺤﻘﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺮﻳﺪﻫﺎ ﺑﺎﻷﻧﻮﺍﻉ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺑﺔ‪.‬‬

‫‪38‬‬

‫ﺗﻌﻠﻢ‬



‫ﺍﻹﺟﺮﺍءﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺰﻧﺔ‪ :‬ﻭﻫﻲ ﻋﺒﺎﺭﺓ ﻋﻦ ﺇﺟﺮﺍءﺍﺕ ﻣﺨﺰﻧﺔ ﻣﺴﺒﻘﺎ ً ﻓﻲ ﻗﺎﻋﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻭﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﻌﻤﻞ‬ ‫ﻣﺤﺪﺩ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﻪ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺪﻋﺎﺋﻬﺎ ﻭﺗﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻹﺟﺮﺍءﺍﺕ ﻣﻦ ﻧﻮﻉ ﻗﺎﻋﺪﺓ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‬ ‫ﺃﻧﻈﺮ ﺍﻟﺸﻜﻞ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ‪.‬‬

‫‪5‬‬

‫‪39‬‬

‫ﺗﻌﻠﻢ‬



‫ﻭﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺎﺕ ﺳﺘﻈﻬﺮ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭﻙ ﻷﺣﺪ ﻁﺮﻕ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺃﻋﻼﻩ‪:‬‬ ‫ﺳﺘﻈﻬﺮ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﻴﺔ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻟﻬﺎ ﺑﺘﻨﺴﻴﻖ ﺍﻟﺤﻘﻮﻝ ﻭ ﻭﺻﻔﻬﺎ ﻭﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺑﺎﻻﺣﺘﻔﺎﻅ ﺑﻬﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﺴﻴﻖ ﺇﺫﺍ ﺃﺭﺩﺕ ﺫﻟﻚ‪:‬‬ ‫‪ Background Color - 1‬ﻟﻮﻥ ﺧﻠﻔﻴﺔ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺑﺈﻣﻜﺎﻧﻚ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻟﻮﻥ ﻣﻌﻴﻦ ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ Text - 2‬ﻭﻫﻮ ﻭﺻﻒ ﻟﻠﺤﻘﻮﻝ ﺑﺈﻣﻜﺎﻧﻚ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻟﻮﻥ ﻭﺷﻜﻞ ﻟﺤﺪﻭﺩ ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻒ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ Columns - 3‬ﺍﻟﺤﻘﻮﻝ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻷﻋﻤﺪﺓ ﻭﻫﻲ ﺣﻘﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﺠﺪﻭﻝ ﻭﺑﺈﻣﻜﺎﻧﻚ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻟﻮﻥ ﻭﺷﻜﻞ ﻟﺤﺪﻭﺩ ﺍﻟﺤﻘﻮﻝ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ - 4‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ‪.Next‬‬

‫ﺳﺘﻈﻬﺮ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺗﺤﺘﻮﻱ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺗﻔﺼﻴﻠﻴﺔ ﻋﻦ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺇﻧﺸﺎﺋﻬﺎ ﻭﻫﻲ ﻟﻠﻘﺮﺍءﺓ ﻓﻘﻂ ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫ﺯﺭ ‪.Finish‬‬

‫‪40‬‬

‫ﺗﻌﻠﻢ‬



‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﺮﺟﻮﻉ ﻟﻠﺸﻜﻞ ﺭﻗﻢ )‪ (3-18‬ﺃﻋﻼﻩ ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺷﺮﺡ ﺃﻧﻮﺍﻉ ﺷﺎﺷﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻔﺼﻴﻞ‪:‬‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻣﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺷﺎﺷﺎﺕ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻭﺷﺎﺷﺎﺕ ﺷﺮﻭﻁ‬ ‫‪Data window Free Form .1‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺒﺤﺚ ﺍﻧﻈﺮ ﺍﻟﺸﻜﻞ )‪.(3-19‬‬ ‫ﻻﺣﻆ ﺗﻨﺴﻴﻖ ﺣﻘﻮﻝ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﺓ ﻛﻤﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺸﻜﻞ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ‪ ،‬ﻭﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﺨﻂ ﻭﻧﻮﻋﻪ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﺳﻲ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﻮﺻﻲ ﺑﻪ ‪Sybase‬‬ ‫ﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﺨﻂ ) ‪ (8‬ﻭﻧﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﺨﻂ ‪ Ms Sans Serif‬ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻻﻧﺘﻬﺎء ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﺴﻴﻖ ﺣﺎﻭﻝ ﺑﺄﻥ ﺗﺤﺮﺹ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻧﻔﺲ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻨﺴﻴﻖ‪.‬‬

‫ﺍﻟﺸﻜﻞ )‪(3-19‬‬ ‫ﺳﺘﻼﺣﻆ ﺃﻥ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺗﻘﺴﻢ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺃﺭﺑﻌﺔ ﺃﻗﺴﺎﻡ ﻛﻤﺎ ﻫﻮ ﻣﻮﺿﺢ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺸﻜﻞ )‪ (3-19‬ﺃﻋﻼﻩ ﻭﻫﻲ ‪:‬‬ ‫‪1‬‬

‫‪Header‬‬

‫‪Detail‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫‪Summary 3‬‬ ‫‪4‬‬

‫‪41‬‬

‫‪Footer‬‬

‫ﺗُﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺗﺮﻭﻳﺴﺔ ﺛﺎﺑﺘﺔ ﻟﻠﺼﻔﺤﺔ ﻻ ﺗﺘﻐﻴﺮ ﺑﺈﻣﻜﺎﻧﻚ ﻭﺿﻊ ﻣﺴﻤﻰ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﻭﻣﺎ ﺷﺎﺑﻪ ﺫﻟﻚ‬ ‫ﻭﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﺭﻳﺮ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺧﺎﺹ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻹﻅﻬﺎﺭ ﺣﻘﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﺠﺪﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﻓﻲ ﻗﺎﻋﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻛﺤﻘﻮﻝ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻓﻲ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻹﻅﻬﺎﺭ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻣﺠﻤﻌﺔ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﻣﻘﺮﻭﻧﺔ ﺑﺂﺧﺮ ﺳﻄﺮ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻣﺜﺎﻝ( ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻉ ﺃﻭ ﻣﺘﻮﺳﻂ‬ ‫ﺣﺴﺎﺑﻲ ﻟﻌﻤﻮﺩ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻷﻋﻤﺪﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺗﺬﻳﻴﻞ ﺛﺎﺑﺖ ﻟﻠﺼﻔﺤﺔ ﻻ ﺗﺘﻐﻴﺮ ﺑﺈﻣﻜﺎﻧﻚ ﻭﺿﻊ ﻣﺴﻤﻰ ﺃﻭ ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﺃﻭ ﺍﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﺪﻳﺮ ﺃﻭ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻮﻗﻴﻊ ﺃﻭ ﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺎﺕ ﻭﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﺭﻳﺮ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻛﺒﻴﺮ‪.‬‬

‫ﺗﻌﻠﻢ‬


‫‪Data Window Tabular .2‬‬

‫ﺑﻘﻠﻢ‪ :‬ﻣﺤﻤﺪ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺮﻱ‬ ‫ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻭﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﺭﻳﺮ ﺃﻧﻈﺮ ﺍﻟﺸﻜﻞ‬ ‫ﺭﻗﻢ )‪.(3-20‬‬

‫ﺍﻟﺸﻜﻞ ﺭﻗﻢ )‪(3-20‬‬ ‫‪Data Window Label .3‬‬

‫ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺇﺫﺍ ﺃﺭﺩﺕ ﻁﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻛﻤﻠﺼﻘﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﻭﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺼﻖ ﻭﺍﺗﺠﺎﻩ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ‪.‬‬

‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭﻙ ﻟﻨﻮﻉ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ‪ Data Window Label‬ﻭﻁﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﺠﺪﺍﻭﻝ ﺳﺘﻈﻬﺮ ﻟﻚ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻛﻤﺎ ﻫﻮ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ‪:‬‬

‫ﺃﺗﺒﻊ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ‪:‬‬

‫‪42‬‬

‫ﺗﻌﻠﻢ‬


‫ﺃﺗﺒﻊ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ‪:‬‬

‫ﺳﺘﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﻨﺘﻴﺠﺔ ﻛﻤﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺸﻜﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ‪:‬‬

‫‪43‬‬


‫ﺗﻌﻠﻢ‬


‫‪Grid .4‬‬

‫ﺑﻘﻠﻢ‪ :‬ﻣﺤﻤﺪ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺮﻱ‬ ‫‪ Tabular‬ﻛﻤﺎ ﺳﺒﻖ ﺃﻥ‬ ‫ﻭﻫﻲ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒﺎ ﻛﻤﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟـ‬ ‫ﺫﻛﺮﻧﺎﻫﺎ ﻭﻫﻲ ﺃﻗﺮﺏ ﻟﻠـ ‪ Grid‬ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻓﻲ ‪.VB 6‬‬

‫ﻫﻨﺎﻙ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺍﻹﻣﻜﺎﻧﻴﺎﺕ ﻟﻠـ ‪ Grid‬ﻋﻨﺪ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺗﻨﻔﻴﺬ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺃﻭ ﻣﺎ ﻳﻌﺮﻑ ‪: Run Mode‬‬ ‫‪ - 1‬ﺑﺈﻣﻜﺎﻧﻚ ﺗﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﻣﻮﺍﻗﻊ ﺍﻷﻋﻤﺪﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ - 2‬ﺑﺈﻣﻜﺎﻧﻚ ﺃﻥ ﺗﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺑﺤﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻮﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫‪News Paper Up Columns .5‬‬

‫ﺃﻋﻤﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺼﺤﻴﻔﺔ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺃﻥ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﻌﺮﺽ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺗﻚ ﻛﺄﻋﻤﺪﺓ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺼﺤﻴﻔﺔ‪.‬‬

‫ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺈﺩﺭﺍﺝ ﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻷﻋﻤﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺃﻥ ﺗﺒﺪﻭﺍ ﻋﻠﻴﻪ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺗﻚ ﻭﺳﻴﻈﻬﺮ ﺷﻜﻞ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻛﺎﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ‪:‬‬

‫ﺗﻼﺣﻆ ﺑﺄﻥ ﻫﻨﺎﻙ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺘﻴﻦ ‪ 1‬ﻭ‪ 2‬ﻭﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﻜﻞ ﻋﻤﻮﺩﻳﻦ‪.‬‬ ‫‪44‬‬

‫ﺗﻌﻠﻢ‬



‫‪Crosstab .6‬‬

‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﺟﻤﻊ ﻁﻮﻟﻲ ﻭﻋﺮﺿﻲ ﻟﻠﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ‬

‫ﻻﺣﻆ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺑﻌﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻮﻧﺔ ﺑﺎﻷﺯﺭﻕ ﻭﺍﻷﺣﻤﺮ ﻭﺍﻷﺧﻀﺮ‪ ،‬ﻻﺣﻈﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﻗﺴﻢ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ‪.‬‬ ‫‪Composite .7‬‬

‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺈﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺷﺎﺷﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺑﺔ ﻛﻤﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺸﻜﻞ ﺃﻋﻼﻩ‪.‬‬ ‫‪45‬‬

‫‪ 1‬ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺼﻤﻴﻢ ﻭﻗﺴﻢ ‪ 2‬ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﻤﻌﺎﻳﻨﺔ‬

‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺠﻤﻴﻊ ﺃﻛﺜﺮ ﻣﻦ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻓﻲ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺭﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﻭﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﻛﻘﻄﺎﻋﺎﺕ ﻓﺮﻋﻴﺔ‪.‬‬

‫ﺗﻌﻠﻢ‬



‫ﺳﺘﻈﻬﺮ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻛﻤﺎ ﻳﻠﻲ‪:‬‬

‫ﺳﺘﺠﺪ ﺷﺎﺷﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﺮﻋﻴﺔ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺸﻜﻞ ﺃﻋﻼﻩ ﺑﺮﻗﻢ ‪ 1‬ﻭﺭﻗﻢ ‪.2‬‬ ‫‪Group .8‬‬

‫ﺗﺠﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺣﺴﺐ ﻓﺌﺔ ﻣﻌﻴﻨﺔ‬

‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺴﺤﺐ ﺣﻘﻞ ﺃﻭ ﺃﻛﺜﺮ ﻣﻦ ﻣﺮﺑﻊ ﺭﻗﻢ ‪ 1‬ﻭﺇﺩﺭﺍﺟﻪ ﻓﻲ ﻣﺮﺑﻊ ﺭﻗﻢ ‪ 2‬ﻟﻴﻜﻮﻥ ﺗﺠﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺣﺴﺐ ﺍﻟﺤﻘﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﻤﺪﺭﺟﺔ ﻓﻲ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺑﻊ ﺭﻗﻢ ‪.2‬‬

‫‪46‬‬

‫ﺗﻌﻠﻢ‬



‫ﺳﺘﻈﻬﺮ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻓﻴﻬﺎ ﺷﻜﻞ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ‪:‬‬

‫ﺭﻗﻢ ‪ 1‬ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ‬ ‫ﺭﻗﻢ ‪ 2‬ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ﺟﺪﻳﺪﺓ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺑﺪﺍﻳﺔ ﻛﻞ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﺟﺪﻳﺪﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺭﻗﻢ ‪ 3‬ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺗﺮﻗﻴﻢ ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺑﺪﺍﻳﺔ ﻛﻞ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ‪.‬‬

‫ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻤﻴﻢ‬ ‫ﺳﺘﻈﻬﺮ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻛﻤﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺸﻜﻞ ﺃﻋﻼﻩ ﻭﻻﺣﻆ ﺗﻘﺴﻴﻢ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪:‬‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫‪3‬‬ ‫‪4‬‬ ‫‪5‬‬ ‫‪6‬‬ ‫‪47‬‬

‫‪Header‬‬ ‫‪Header Group‬‬ ‫‪Detail‬‬ ‫‪Trailer Group‬‬ ‫‪Summary‬‬ ‫‪Footer‬‬

‫ﺗﺮﻭﻳﺴﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ‬ ‫ﺗﺮﻭﻳﺴﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ‬ ‫ﺗﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺠﻤﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﻔﺮﻋﻲ ﻟﻠﻤﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ‬ ‫ﻣﻠﺨﺺ ﻟﻠﺼﻔﺤﺔ‬ ‫ﺗﺬﻳﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ‬

‫ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺎﻳﻨﺔ‬

‫ﺗﻌﻠﻢ‬


‫‪Graph .9‬‬

‫ﺑﻘﻠﻢ‪ :‬ﻣﺤﻤﺪ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺮﻱ‬ ‫ﺭﺳﻢ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﻟﻠﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ‬

‫ﺳﺘﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺈﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻗﻄﺎﻉ ﻭﺇﺳﻨﺎﺩ ﺣﻘﻞ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻛﻤﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻢ ‪ 1‬ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺸﻜﻞ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ‬ ‫ﻭﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻐﺬﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﻛﻤﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻢ ‪ 2‬ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺸﻜﻞ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ‪.‬‬

‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺈﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﻛﻤﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺭﻗﻢ ‪ 1‬ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺸﻜﻞ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ‪ ،‬ﻭﺛﻢ ﺣﺪﺩ ﺃﺣﺪ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﻛﻤﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﻄﺔ ﺭﻗﻢ ‪2‬‬

‫‪48‬‬

‫ﺗﻌﻠﻢ‬



‫ﺳﺘﻈﻬﺮ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻛﺮﺳﻢ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻤﻴﻢ‬

‫ﺳﺘﻈﻬﺮ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻛﺮﺳﻢ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻔﻴﺬ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺎﻳﻨﺔ‪.‬‬

‫ﻓﻲ ﻧﻬﺎﻳﺔ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﺠﺰﺋﻴﺔ ﻻ ﺑﺪ ﺃﻥ ﺃﻗﻮﻝ ﺑﺄﻥ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻜﺎﻣﻠﺔ ﺳﺘﺘﻀﺢ ﺟﻠﻴﺎ ً ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻔﺼﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺣﻴﺚ ﺃﻧﻬﺎ ﻓﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﻭﻣﺎ‬ ‫ﻗﺪﻣﺘﻪ ﺁﻧﻔﺎ ً ﺇﻧﻤﺎ ﺳﻮﻯ ﺗﺄﺳﻴﺲ ﻟﻸﺩﻭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺘﻴﺤﻬﺎ ﺍﻟـ ‪ PB‬ﻭﺳﺘﺸﺎﻫﺪ ﺃﻥ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﻣﻔﻴﺪﺓ ﺟﺪﺍً ﻓﻲ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻘﻚ ﺍﻟﺘﻔﺼﻴﻠﻲ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻲ‪.‬‬

‫‪49‬‬

‫ﺗﻌﻠﻢ‬



‫ﺭﺍﺑﻌﺎ ً( ‪ Database‬ﺃﺩﻭﺍﺕ ﻗﺎﻋﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ‪:‬‬ ‫ﻭﻫﻲ ﺃﺩﻭﺍﺕ ﻣﺨﺘﺼﺔ ﺑﺈﺩﺍﺭﺓ ﻗﺎﻋﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﺒﺎﺷﺮ ﻭﻟﻠﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﻟﻬﺬﻩ ﺍﻷﺩﻭﺍﺕ ﺃﺗﺒﻊ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‬ ‫‪ .1‬ﺃﺫﻫﺐ ﻟﻠﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ ﻭﺃﺧﺘﺮ ) ‪ New‬ﺟﺪﻳﺪ (‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .2‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ‪.Database Painter‬‬ ‫‪ .3‬ﺳﺘﻈﻬﺮ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻛﻤﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺸﻜﻞ ﺭﻗﻢ )‪ (3-21‬ﻻﺣﻆ ﺃﻥ ﺃﻫﻢ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﺋﻨﺎﺕ ﻛﻤﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺼﻨﺪﻭﻕ ﺍﻷﺣﻤﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺤﺘﺎﺟﻬﺎ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ‬ ‫ﻛﺒﻴﺮ ﻭﻣﺘﻜﺮﺭ‪ ،‬ﻭﺳﻨﺒﺪﺃ ﺑﺸﺮﺡ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﺋﻨﺎﺕ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﻔﺼﻞ‪:‬‬

‫ﺍﻟﺸﻜﻞ ﺭﻗﻢ )‪(3-21‬‬

‫‪1‬‬

‫‪50‬‬

‫ﺭﺳﺎﻡ ﺃﻭ ﻣﺤﺮﺭ ﻗﺎﻋﺪﺓ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ‬

‫ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﺠﺰﺋﻴﺔ ﻣﻬﻤﺔ ﺟﺪﺍً ﻓﻤﻦ ﺧﻼﻟﻬﺎ ﺗﺴﺘﻄﻴﻊ ﺃﻥ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺈﻧﺸﺎء ﺍﻟﻜﺜﻴﺮ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺗﺒﻄﺔ ﺑﻘﻮﺍﻋﺪ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻭﻣﻨﻬﺎ‪:‬‬ ‫• ﺇﻧﺸﺎء ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﻣﻊ ﻗﺎﻋﺪﺓ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻣﻦ ﺷﺘﻰ ﺍﻷﻧﻮﺍﻉ ﻣﺜﻞ‪:‬‬ ‫‪.(MS SQL Server) ‬‬ ‫‪.Oracle 8i, 9i, 10g ‬‬ ‫‪ ODBC ‬ﻣﺼﺎﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺇﻧﺸﺎء ﺃﻭ ﺗﻌﺪﻳﻞ ﺃﻭ ﺣﺬﻑ ﺟﺪﻭﻝ‪ ،‬ﺣﻘﻞ‪ ،‬ﻋﻼﻗﺔ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺟﺪﻭﻟﻴﻦ‪ ،‬ﻣﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﺳﺄﻗﻮﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺠﻮﺍﻧﺐ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻬﻤﻚ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻲ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺳﻴﻈﻬﺮ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ‬ ‫ﺍﻷﻫﻤﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺳﺘﺴﺘﻔﻴﺪﻫﺎ ﻣﻦ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﺠﺰﺋﻴﺔ‪ .‬ﺃﻧﻈﺮ ﺍﻟﺸﻜﻞ ﺭﻗﻢ )‪.(3-22‬‬

‫ﺗﻌﻠﻢ‬




‫ﺳﺘﻼﺣﻆ ﺷﺠﺮﺓ ﻗﻮﺍﻋﺪ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺑﺤﻴﺚ ﺗﺘﻴﺢ ﻟﻚ ‪ PB‬ﺍﻟﻌﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ ﻗﻮﺍﻋﺪ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻬﺎ‪ ،‬ﺍﻧﻈﺮ ﺍﻟﺸﻜﻞ ﺃﻋﻼﻩ‬ ‫ﻻﺣﻆ ﺭﻗﻢ ‪ 1‬ﻗﺎﻋﺪﺓ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ‪ O84 Oracle8/8i‬ﻗﻤﻨﺎ ﺑﺨﻠﻖ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﻣﻊ ﻗﺎﻋﺪﺓ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻣﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻣﺴﺒﻘﺎ ً ﻭﺳﻤﻴﻨﺎ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ‬ ‫‪ Def‬ﻻﺣﻆ ﺭﻗﻢ ‪.2‬‬ ‫ﻟﻠﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﻟﺨﺼﺎﺋﺺ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ‪ Def‬ﺍﺗﺒﻊ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻛﻤﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺸﻜﻞ ﺭﻗﻢ )‪:(3-23‬‬ ‫‪ .1‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻔﺄﺭﺓ ﺍﻷﻳﻤﻦ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ‪ Def‬ﺳﺘﻈﻬﺮ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .2‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺈﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ‪ Properties‬ﺧﺼﺎﺋﺺ‪.‬‬

‫ﺍﻟﺸﻜﻞ ﺭﻗﻢ )‪(3-23‬‬ ‫‪51‬‬

‫ﺗﻌﻠﻢ‬



‫ﺳﺘﻈﻬﺮ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺧﺼﺎﺋﺺ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﻘﺎﻋﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ‪ Def‬ﻛﻤﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺸﻜﻞ ﺭﻗﻢ )‪(3-24‬‬

‫‪2‬‬ ‫‪3‬‬

‫‪Profile Name‬‬ ‫‪Server‬‬

‫ﺍﻟﺸﻜﻞ ﺭﻗﻢ )‪(3-24‬‬ ‫ﺍﺳﻢ ﻣﻠﻒ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺧﺪﻣﺔ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﻗﺎﻋﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ‬

‫‪4‬‬

‫‪Login ID‬‬

‫ﺍﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ‬

‫‪5‬‬

‫‪Password‬‬

‫ﻛﻠﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻭﺭ‬

‫ﺍﻛﺘﺐ ﺃﻱ ﺍﺳﻢ ﻭﻟﻴﻜﻦ ‪def‬‬ ‫ﻭﺳﺘﻜﻮﻥ ﻣﻌﺮﻓﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻲ‬ ‫ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﻓﻲ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻣﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣﻲ ﻗﺎﻋﺪﺓ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺇﻧﺸﺎﺋﻬﺎ ﺃﻭﻝ ﻣﺮﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﻓﻲ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻣﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣﻲ ﻗﺎﻋﺪﺓ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺇﻧﺸﺎﺋﻬﺎ ﺃﻭﻝ ﻣﺮﺓ‪.‬‬

‫ﺍﻟﺸﻜﻞ ﺭﻗﻢ )‪(3-25‬‬ ‫‪Power Builder Catalog Table Owner 2‬‬

‫ﻛﺘﺎﻟﻮﺝ ﻣﺎﻟﻚ ﺍﻟﺠﺪﺍﻭﻝ‬

‫‪Table Owner 3‬‬

‫ﻣﺎﻟﻚ ﺍﻟﺠﺪﺍﻭﻝ‬

‫‪52‬‬

‫ﻳﺠﺐ ﺃﻥ ﺗﻀﻊ ﺍﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺗﺒﻂ ﺑﻘﺎﻋﺪﺓ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺠﺪﺍﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺗﺒﻄﺔ ﺑﻪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻛﺮﺭ ﺍﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺑﻘﺔ‪.‬‬

‫ﺗﻌﻠﻢ‬




‫‪2‬‬

‫‪3‬‬ ‫‪4‬‬

‫‪53‬‬

‫ﻻﺣﻆ ﻧﺺ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﻳﻘﻮﻡ ﺍﻟـ‬ ‫‪ PB‬ﺑﺈﻧﺸﺎﺋﻪ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺎ ً‬ ‫‪ Database Connection Syntax‬ﻧﺺ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﻘﺎﻋﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﻭﺳﻨﺴﺘﻔﻴﺪ ﻣﻦ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻨﺺ‬ ‫ﻻﺣﻘﺎ ً‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﻨﺴﺦ ﺍﻟﻨﺺ ﻭﻟﺼﻘﻪ ﻓﻲ‬ ‫ﻧﺴﺦ ﺍﻟﻨﺺ‬ ‫‪Copy‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺃﻥ ﺗﻔﺤﺺ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ‬ ‫ﻓﺤﺺ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﻣﻊ ﻗﺎﻋﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺑﻘﺎﻋﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻫﻞ ﻫﻮ ﻧﺎﺟﺢ‬ ‫‪Test Connection‬‬ ‫ﺃﻡ ﻻ؟‬

‫ﺗﻌﻠﻢ‬



‫ﻣﺤﺮﺭ ﺟﻤﻞ ﺍﺳﺘﻌﻼﻡ ‪ SQL‬ﺗﺘﻴﺢ ﻟﻚ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﺠﺰﺋﻴﺔ ﺇﻧﺸﺎء ﺟﻤﻠﺔ ﺍﺳﺘﻌﻼﻡ ﻭﺣﻔﻈﻬﺎ ﺑﺎﺳﻢ‬ ‫ﻭﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺑﺴﻬﻮﻟﺔ‬ ‫‪Statement‬‬

‫‪2‬‬ ‫‪.1‬‬ ‫‪.2‬‬ ‫‪.3‬‬ ‫‪.4‬‬ ‫‪.5‬‬

‫ﺃﺫﻫﺐ ﻟﻠﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ ﻭﺃﺧﺘﺮ ) ‪ New‬ﺟﺪﻳﺪ‬ ‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺈﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ‪. Database‬‬ ‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺈﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ‪.Query‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺯﺭ ‪.OK‬‬ ‫ﺳﺘﻈﻬﺮ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻛﻤﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺸﻜﻞ ﺭﻗﻢ )‪.(3-28‬‬

‫ﺳﺘﻈﻬﺮ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺠﺪﺍﻭﻝ ﻗﻢ‬ ‫ﺑﺈﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺟﺪﻭﻝ ﺃﻭ ﺃﻛﺜﺮ ﺛﻢ ﻗﻢ‬ ‫ﺑﺎﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ‪ Open‬ﻭﻓﻲ ﻫﺬﺍ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺜﺎﻝ ﻗﻤﻨﺎ ﺑﺈﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺠﺪﻭﻝ‬ ‫‪t_man_main‬‬

‫( ﺳﺘﻈﻬﺮ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻛﻤﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺸﻜﻞ ﺭﻗﻢ )‪.(3-27‬‬


‫ﺍﻟﺸﻜﻞ ﺭﻗﻢ )‪(3-28‬‬ ‫‪54‬‬

‫ﺗﻌﻠﻢ‬



‫ﺳﻴﻈﻬﺮ ﻣﺤﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺠﺪﻭﻝ‬ ‫ﻛﻤﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺸﻜـﻞ ﺭﻗﻢ‬ ‫)‪.(3-29‬‬ ‫‪ - 1‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺤﻘﻮﻝ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺮﻳﺪﻫﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ - 2‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫ﺃﻳﻘﻮﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﺤﻔﻆ‬ ‫ﻣﻦ ﺷﺮﻳﻂ ﺍﻷﺩﻭﺍﺕ‪.‬‬

‫ﺳﺘﻈﻬﺮ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺣﻔﻆ ﺍﻟـ‬ ‫‪ Query‬ﻛﻤﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺸﻜﻞ‬ ‫ﺭﻗﻢ )‪.(3-40‬‬ ‫‪ - 1‬ﺍﺩﺧﻞ ﺍﺳﻢ ﺍﻟـ‬ ‫‪.Query‬‬ ‫‪ - 2‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺘﺒﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺣﻔﻆ‬ ‫ﺍﻟـ ‪ Query‬ﻓﻴﻬﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ - 3‬ﺛﻢ ﻗﻢ ﺑﻀﻐﻂ ﺯﺭ‬ ‫‪. OK‬‬



‫‪3‬‬ ‫‪.1‬‬ ‫‪.2‬‬ ‫‪.3‬‬ ‫‪.4‬‬

‫‪55‬‬

‫ﺃﻧﺎﺑﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺗﺘﻴﺢ ﻟﻚ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﺠﺰﺋﻴﺔ ﻧﻘﻞ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻣﻦ ﺟﺪﻭﻝ ﻵﺧﺮ ﺃﻭ ﻣﻦ ﻗﺎﻋﺪﺓ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺇﻟﻰ‬ ‫ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪ ،‬ﻭﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻬﺎ ﻟﻼﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﺓ ﻣﻦ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻣﻬﻤﺔ ﻭﻣﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻣﺴﺒﻘﺎ ً ﻓﻲ‬ ‫ﻗﺎﻋﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺃﺫﻫﺐ ﻟﻠﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ ﻭﺃﺧﺘﺮ ) ‪ New‬ﺟﺪﻳﺪ( ﺳﺘﻈﻬﺮ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻛﻤﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺸﻜﻞ ﺭﻗﻢ )‪.(3-40‬‬ ‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ‪. Database‬‬ ‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ‪.Data Pipeline‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺯﺭ ‪ ،OK‬ﺳﺘﻈﻬﺮ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻛﻤﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺸﻜﻞ ﺭﻗﻢ )‪.(3-41‬‬

‫ﺗﻌﻠﻢ‬



‫ﺍﻟﺸﻜﻞ ﺭﻗﻢ )‪(3-40‬‬ ‫‪- 1‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻁﺮﻳﻘﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻭﻗﺪ‬ ‫ﺳﺒﻖ ﺃﻥ ﺷﺮﺣﻨﺎﻩ‬ ‫ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻔﺼﻴﻞ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ - 2‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺪﺭ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ - 3‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ - 4‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪Ok‬‬ ‫ﺳﺘﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‬ ‫ﺭﻗﻢ )‪.(3-42‬‬


‫‪56‬‬

‫ﺗﻌﻠﻢ‬


‫‪- 1‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺟﺪﻭﻝ‬ ‫ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺠﺪﺍﻭﻝ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺮﻭﺿﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﻟﻴﻜﻦ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺠﺪﻭﻝ‬ ‫‪.t_man_main‬‬ ‫‪- 2‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺯﺭ‬ ‫‪ Open‬ﺳﺘﻈﻬﺮ‬ ‫ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻛﻤﺎ ﻓﻲ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺸﻜﻞ ﺭﻗﻢ ) ‪-43‬‬ ‫‪.(3‬‬ ‫‪ - 1‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺤﻘﻮﻝ‬ ‫ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺠﺪﻭﻝ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ - 2‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ‬ ‫‪،Return‬‬ ‫ﺳﺘﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‬ ‫ﻛﻤﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺸﻜﻞ ﺭﻗﻢ‬ ‫)‪.(3-44‬‬




‫‪1‬‬ ‫ﻁﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﻧﻘﻞ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ‬ ‫‪Source Name 2‬‬ ‫‪57‬‬

‫ﺍﻟﺸﻜﻞ ﺭﻗﻢ )‪(3-44‬‬ ‫‪Create – Add Table.‬‬ ‫‪Replace – Drop/Add Table.‬‬ ‫‪Refresh – Delete/Insert Rows.‬‬ ‫‪Append – Insert Rows.‬‬ ‫‪Update – Update/Insert Rows.‬‬ ‫ﺃﺳﻤﺎء ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺪﺭ‬

‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬

‫• ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺟﺪﻭﻝ ﺟﺪﻳﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺗﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﺍﻟﺠﺪﻭﻝ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺚ ﺍﻟﺠﺪﻭﻝ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺳﻄﻮﺭ ﻟﻠﺠﺪﻭﻝ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺣﻔﻆ ﻭ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺳﻄﻮﺭ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﺓ ﺣﻘﻮﻝ‬ ‫ﺟﺪﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺪﺭ‪.‬‬

‫ﺗﻌﻠﻢ‬



‫‪Destination Name 3‬‬

‫ﺃﺳﻤﺎء ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ‬

‫‪Execute 4‬‬

‫ﺗﻨﻔﻴﺬ‬

‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﺓ ﺣﻘﻮﻝ‬ ‫ﺟﺪﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺗﻨﻔﻴﺬ ﺻﻴﻐﺔ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﻞ ﻛﻤﺎ‬ ‫ﻫﻮ ﻭﺍﺿﺢ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺍﺕ‬ ‫ﻣﻦ ‪ 1‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪.3‬‬

‫ﺧﺎﻣﺴﺎ ً( ‪ Project‬ﺃﺩﻭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﺮﻭﻉ‪:‬‬ ‫ﻭﻫﻲ ﺃﺩﻭﺍﺕ ﻣﺨﺘﺼﺔ ﺑﺈﻧﺸﺎء ﻭﺇﺩﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻔﻴﺬﻱ ) ‪ (*.exe‬ﻭﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟـ )‪ (*.PBD‬ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻀﻢ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﺋﻨﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ‬ ‫ﺑﺎﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺈﻧﺸﺎﺋﻪ ﺑﻤﻌﻨﻰ ﺁﺧﺮ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﻌﻤﻞ ﻧﺴﺨﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﻣﻐﻠﻘﺔ ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺪﻳﻞ ﻋﻠﻴﻬﺎ ﻭﻟﻜﻦ ﺗﺼﻠﺢ‬ ‫ﻟﺘﻨﻔﻴﺬﻫﺎ ﻭﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺒﻬﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣﻴﻦ ﺃﻭ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺑﻴﻌﻬﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻗﺮﺍﺹ ﻣﺪﻣﺠﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﻟﻠﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﻟﻬﺬﻩ ﺍﻷﺩﻭﺍﺕ ﺃﺗﺒﻊ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺍﺕ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪:‬‬ ‫‪.1‬ﺃﺫﻫﺐ ﻟﻠﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ ﻭﺃﺧﺘﺮ ) ‪ New‬ﺟﺪﻳﺪ (‪.‬‬ ‫‪.2‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ‪.Project‬‬ ‫‪.3‬ﺳﺘﻈﻬﺮ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻛﻤﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺸﻜﻞ ﺭﻗﻢ ) ‪ (3-45‬ﻻﺣﻆ ﺃﻥ ﺃﻫﻢ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﺋﻨﺎﺕ ﻛﻤﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺼﻨﺪﻭﻕ ﺍﻷﺣﻤﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺤﺘﺎﺟﻬﺎ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ‬ ‫ﻛﺒﻴﺮ ﻭﻣﺘﻜﺮﺭ‪ ،‬ﻭﺳﻨﺒﺪﺃ ﺑﺸﺮﺡ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﺋﻨﺎﺕ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﻔﺼﻞ‪:‬‬

‫ﺷﻜﻞ ﺭﻗﻢ )‪(3-45‬‬

‫‪58‬‬

‫ﺗﻌﻠﻢ‬


‫ﺑﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻖ‬ ‫ﺑﺎﻟﻤﺴﺎﻋﺪﺓ‬

‫‪3‬‬

‫‪.1‬‬ ‫‪.2‬‬ ‫‪.3‬‬ ‫‪.4‬‬

‫ﺑﻘﻠﻢ‪ :‬ﻣﺤﻤﺪ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺮﻱ‬ ‫ﺗﺘﻴﺢ ﻟﻚ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺇﻧﺸﺎء ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻔﻴﺬﻱ ‪ exe‬ﻭﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ‪ PBD‬ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﻚ ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ ﻣﺴﺎﻋﺪ ﺍﻹﻧﺸﺎء‪.‬‬

‫ﺃﺫﻫﺐ ﻟﻠﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ ﻭﺃﺧﺘﺮ ) ‪ New‬ﺟﺪﻳﺪ( ﺳﺘﻈﻬﺮ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻛﻤﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺸﻜﻞ ﺭﻗﻢ )‪.(3-45‬‬ ‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ‪. Project‬‬ ‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ‪.Application Wizard‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺯﺭ ‪ ،OK‬ﺳﺘﻈﻬﺮ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻛﻤﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺸﻜﻞ ﺭﻗﻢ )‪.(3-46‬‬

‫ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺑﻌﺮﺽ‬ ‫ﻣﺨﺘﺼﺮ ﻋﻦ ﻋﻤﻞ ﻫﺬﻩ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺠﺰﺋﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ -1‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ‬ ‫‪Next‬ﻛﻤﺎ ﻫﻮ ﻣﻮﺿﺢ‬ ‫ﺳﺘﻈﻬﺮ ﻟﻚ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻛﻤﺎ ﻓﻲ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺸﻜﻞ ﺭﻗﻢ )‪.(3-47‬‬

‫ﺗﺴﺄﻟﻚ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻜﺘﺒﺔ‬ ‫ﺳﺘﺤﻔﻆ ﻣﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﺮﻭﻉ؟‬ ‫‪ - 1‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺃﺣﺪ ﻫﺬﻩ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺘﺒﺎﺕ ﻟﺤﻔﻆ ﻣﻠﻒ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺸﺮﻭﻉ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ - 2‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ‬ ‫‪.NEXT‬‬ ‫ﺳﺘﻈﻬﺮ ﻟﻚ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻛﻤﺎ ﻓﻲ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺸﻜﻞ ﺭﻗﻢ )‪.(3-48‬‬

‫ﺷﻜﻞ ﺭﻗﻢ )‪(3-46‬‬

‫ﺷﻜﻞ ﺭﻗﻢ )‪(3-47‬‬ ‫‪59‬‬

‫ﺗﻌﻠﻢ‬



‫ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺗﻮﺿﺢ ﺃﻥ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺸﺮﻭﻉ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﻨﻲ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺃﻥ‬ ‫ﻳﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻻﺣﻘﺎ ً ﻟﺒﻨﺎء ﺃﻭ ﻟﻨﺸﺮ‬ ‫ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻘﻚ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ - 1‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺈﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﺮﻭﻉ‬ ‫‪ - 2‬ﺛﻢ ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ‬ ‫‪. NEXT‬‬ ‫ﺳﺘﻈﻬﺮ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻛﻤﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺸﻜﻞ‬ ‫ﺭﻗﻢ )‪.(3-49‬‬

‫ﺷﻜﻞ ﺭﻗﻢ )‪(3-48‬‬ ‫ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺗﺒﻴﻦ ﻟﻚ ﺑﻀﺮﻭﺭﺓ‬ ‫ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻔﻴﺬﻱ ‪exe‬‬ ‫ﻭﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﺳﻢ ﻣﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺍﺭﺩ‬ ‫)ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭﻱ(‪.‬‬ ‫‪ - 1‬ﻳﻘﻮﻡ ﺍﻟـ ‪ PB‬ﺑﺎﻗﺘﺮﺍﺡ ﺍﺳﻢ‬ ‫ﻟﻠﻤﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻔﻴﺬﻱ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺎ ً ﺣﺴﺐ‬ ‫ﺍﺳﻢ ﺍﻟـﺘﻄﺒﻴﻖ‬ ‫‪ ،Application‬ﺃﻭ ﻗﻢ‬ ‫ﺑﺈﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻔﻴﺬ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ - 2‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺈﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﺳﻢ ﻣﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺍﺭﺩ‬ ‫ﻭﻫﻮ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭﻱ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﻟﻤﻘﺼﻮﺩ‬ ‫ﺑﻤﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺍﺭﺩ‪ :‬ﻣﻠﻒ ﻣﻦ‬ ‫ﺇﻣﺘﺪﺍﺩ ‪ *.pbr‬ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺘﺨﺰﻳﻦ‬ ‫ﺃﺳﻤﺎء ﺻﻮﺭ ﺑﺈﻣﺘﺪﺍﺩﺗﻬﺎ‬ ‫ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻓﻲ ﺑﻨﺎء ﺑﻌﺾ‬ ‫ﺟﺰﺋﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﻟﻜﻲ ﻻ‬ ‫ﺗﺨﺘﻔﻲ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﻋﻨﺪ ﻧﻘﻞ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻔﻴﺬﻱ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ‬ ‫ﺁﺧﺮ ﻭﺑﻤﺴﺎﺭ ﺁﺧﺮ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ - 3‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺯﺭ ‪ NEXT‬ﺳﺘﻈﻬﺮ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻛﻤﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺸﻜﻞ ﺭﻗﻢ‬ ‫)‪.(3-50‬‬

‫‪60‬‬

‫ﺷﻜﻞ ﺭﻗﻢ )‪(3-49‬‬

‫ﺗﻌﻠﻢ‬


‫ﺗﺴﺄﻟﻚ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺴﺆﺍﻝ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ‪ :‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺄﻛﺪ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﻨﺖ‬ ‫ﺗﺮﻏﺐ ﺑﺘﻨﺒﻴﻬﻚ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻘﺪﻳﻤﺔ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺘﺎﺑﺔ‬ ‫ﻓﻮﻗﻬﺎ ﻣﻦ ﺟﺪﻳﺪ؟‬ ‫‪ - 1‬ﺍﻟﺘﻨﺒﻴﻪ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﻜﺘﺎﺑﺔ ﻓﻮﻕ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻘﺪﻳﻤﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ : Full Build - 2‬ﻫﻮ ﺑﻨﺎء‬ ‫ﻛﺎﻣﻞ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺑﺠﻤﻴﻊ‬ ‫ﻣﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺗﻪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪Incremental‬‬ ‫‪-3‬‬ ‫‪ : Build‬ﺑﻨﺎء ﺗﻜﻤﻴﻠﻲ‬ ‫ﻭﺍﻟﻤﻘﺼﻮﺩ ﺑﻬﺎ ﻓﻘﻂ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻜﺎﺋﻨﺎﺕ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﻮﻧﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻐﻴﺮﺕ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺑﻨﺎﺋﻬﺎ‬ ‫ﻣﻦ ﺟﺪﻳﺪ‪ ،‬ﻭﺗﺄﺧﺬ ﻭﻗﺖ‬ ‫ﺃﻗﻞ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ - 4‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ‬ ‫‪ ، NEXT‬ﺳﺘﻈﻬﺮ‬ ‫ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻛﻤﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺸﻜﻞ‬ ‫ﺭﻗﻢ )‪.(3-51‬‬ ‫ﺗﺴﺄﻟﻚ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺴﺆﺍﻝ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ‪ :‬ﻫﻞ ﺗﺮﻏﺐ ﺑﺈﻧﺸﺎء‬ ‫ﺭﻣﺰ ﺍﻵﻟﺔ ﻟﻠﺘﻄﺒﻴﻖ؟‬ ‫‪ :No- 1‬ﻻ ﺗﻘﻢ ﺑﺈﻧﺸﺎء ﺭﻣﺰ‬ ‫ﺍﻵﻟﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ :Yes- 2‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺈﻧﺸﺎء ﺭﻣﺰ‬ ‫ﺍﻵﻟﺔ ‪ EXE‬ﻭ‪ ،Dll‬ﻗﻢ‬ ‫ﺑﺎﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ ﺭﻗﻢ ‪1‬‬ ‫ﻭﻫﻮ ﺍﻷﻓﻀﻞ‪.‬‬ ‫‪- 3‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ‬ ‫‪ NEXT‬ﺳﺘﻈﻬﺮ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ‬ ‫ﻛﻤـﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺸﻜﻞ ﺭﻗﻢ‬ ‫)‪.(3-52‬‬


‫ﺷﻜﻞ ﺭﻗﻢ )‪(3-50‬‬

‫ﺷﻜﻞ ﺭﻗﻢ )‪(3-51‬‬

‫‪61‬‬

‫ﺗﻌﻠﻢ‬



‫ﺗﻮﺿﺢ ﻟﻚ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺇﺫﺍ‬ ‫ﺭﻏﺒﺖ ﺑﺒﻨﺎء ﻣﻜﺘﺒﺎﺕ ﺗﻨﻔﻴﺬ‬ ‫ﺩﻳﻨﺎﻣﻜﻴﺔ ﻭﻫﻲ ‪.PBD‬‬ ‫‪ - 1‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ - 2‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ‬ ‫‪ NEXT‬ﺳﺘﻈﻬﺮ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ‬ ‫ﻛﻤﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺸﻜﻞ)‪.(3-53‬‬

‫ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺗﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺑﻮﺿﻊ‬ ‫ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﻋﻦ ﺷﺮﻛﺘﻚ ﻭﺍﺳﻢ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﻭﻭﺻﻒ ﻭﺣﻘﻮﻕ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻨﺴﺦ ﻭ ﺍﻹﺻﺪﺍﺭ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ - 1‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻌﺒﺌﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺇﺫﺍ‬ ‫ﺭﻏﺒﺖ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ - 2‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ‬ ‫‪ ،NEXT‬ﺳﺘﻈﻬﺮ‬ ‫ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻛﻤﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺸﻜﻞ‬ ‫ﺭﻗﻢ )‪.(3-54‬‬

‫ﺷﻜﻞ ﺭﻗﻢ )‪(3-52‬‬

‫ﺷﻜﻞ ﺭﻗﻢ )‪(3-53‬‬

‫‪62‬‬

‫ﺗﻌﻠﻢ‬



‫ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺗﻮﺿﺢ ﻟﻚ‬ ‫ﻣﻠﺨﺺ ﻋﻦ ﺧﺼﺎﺋﺺ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺇﻧﺸﺎﺋﻪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪Generate To Do - 1‬‬ ‫‪ :list‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﺍﺧﺘﺮﺕ ﻫﺬﺍ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ ﺳﺘﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺈﻧﺸﺎء‬ ‫ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺑﺈﺟﺮﺍءﺍﺕ ﻳﺠﺐ‬ ‫ﺃﻥ ﺗﻌﻤﻞ‪ ،‬ﺃﻧﺼﺢ ﺑﻌﺪ‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭﻫﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ - 2‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ‬ ‫‪ ،Finish‬ﺳﺘﻈﻬﺮ‬ ‫ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻛﻤﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺸﻜﻞ‬ ‫ﺭﻗﻢ )‪.(3-56‬‬

‫ﻫﺬﻩ ﻫﻲ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺑﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺳﻮﻑ‬ ‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﺣﻔﻈﻬﺎ ﻛﻜﺎﺋﻦ ﻧﺴﺘﻄﻴﻊ‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻘﺒﻞ‬ ‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﺟﺔ ﻹﻧﺘﺎﺝ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﺗﻨﻔﻴﺬﻳﺔ ﺑﻌﺪ ﻋﻤﻞ ﺗﻌﺪﻳﻞ‬ ‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺃﻭ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ‬ ‫ﻛﺎﺋﻨﺎﺕ ﺟﺪﻳﺪﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺭﺍﺟﻊ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺸﺮﻭﻉ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻔﻴﺬ‪ ،‬ﻭﻻ‬ ‫ﺗﻨﺴﻰ ﺃﻥ ﺗﺨﺘﺎﺭ ﻁﺮﻳﻘﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺒﻨﺎء ﺇﻣﺎ ﺗﻜﻤﻴﻠﻴﺔ ﺃﻭ‬ ‫ﻛﺎﻣﻠﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻳﻘﻮﻧﺔ‬ ‫‪ Deploy‬ﺍﻟﻨﺸﺮ ‪.‬‬

‫ﺷﻜﻞ ﺭﻗﻢ )‪(3-55‬‬

‫ﻭﺑﻌﺪﻫﺎ ﺳﻴﻨﺘﺞ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻔﻴﺬﻱ ‪ *.exe‬ﻭﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ‬ ‫‪*.pbd‬‬

‫ﺷﻜﻞ ﺭﻗﻢ )‪(3-56‬‬ ‫‪63‬‬

‫ﺗﻌﻠﻢ‬


‫‪4‬‬

‫ﺑﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻖ‬

‫ﺑﻘﻠﻢ‪ :‬ﻣﺤﻤﺪ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺮﻱ‬ ‫ﺗﺘﻴﺢ ﻟﻚ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺇﻧﺸﺎء ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻔﻴﺬﻱ ‪ exe‬ﻭﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ‪ PBD‬ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﻚ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻳﺪﻭﻱ ﻭﻣﺒﺎﺷﺮ‪.‬‬

‫‪ .1‬ﺃﺫﻫﺐ ﻟﻠﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ ﻭﺃﺧﺘﺮ ) ‪ New‬ﺟﺪﻳﺪ( ﺳﺘﻈﻬﺮ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻛﻤﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺸﻜﻞ ﺭﻗﻢ )‪.(3-57‬‬ ‫‪ .2‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ‪ .3 . Project‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ‪ .4 .Application‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺯﺭ ‪ ،OK‬ﺳﺘﻈﻬﺮ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻛﻤﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺸﻜﻞ ﺭﻗﻢ )‪.(3-58‬‬

‫ﺷﻜﻞ ﺭﻗﻢ )‪(3-57‬‬ ‫ﺗﻼﺣﻆ ﺑﺄﻥ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﻓﺎﺭﻍ‬ ‫ﻭﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺃﻥ‬ ‫ﺗﻀﻊ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ‬ ‫ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺗﻚ ﻣﺒﺎﺷﺮﺓ‬ ‫ﻭﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺤﻔﻆ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻖ‬ ‫ﻭﺗﻨﻔﻴﺬﻩ ﺃﻭ‬ ‫ﻧﺸﺮﻩ‬ ‫‪.Deploy‬‬

‫ﺷﻜﻞ ﺭﻗﻢ )‪(3-58‬‬ ‫‪64‬‬

‫ﺗﻌﻠﻢ‬



‫ﺳﺎﺩﺳﺎ ً( ‪ Tool‬ﺃﺩﻭﺍﺕ ﻋﺎﻣﺔ‪:‬‬ ‫ﻭﻫﻲ ﺃﺩﻭﺍﺕ ﻋﺎﻣﺔ ﺗﺴﺎﻋﺪ ﻣﺒﺮﻣﺠﻲ ﺍﻟـ ‪ PB‬ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺃﺩﻭﺍﺕ ﺳﻬﻠﺔ ﺗﺴﺎﻋﺪ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﺴﻬﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻞ‪ ،‬ﻭﻟﻠﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﻟﻬﺬﻩ ﺍﻷﺩﻭﺍﺕ‬ ‫ﺃﺗﺒﻊ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪:‬‬ ‫‪ .1‬ﺃﺫﻫﺐ ﻟﻠﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ ﻭﺃﺧﺘﺮ ) ‪ New‬ﺟﺪﻳﺪ (‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .2‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ‪.Tool‬‬ ‫‪ .3‬ﺳﺘﻈﻬﺮ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻛﻤﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺸﻜﻞ ﺭﻗﻢ ) ‪ (3-59‬ﻻﺣﻆ ﺃﻥ ﺃﻫﻢ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﺋﻨﺎﺕ ﻛﻤﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺼﻨﺪﻭﻕ ﺍﻷﺣﻤﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺤﺘﺎﺟﻬﺎ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ‬ ‫ﻛﺒﻴﺮ ﻭﻣﺘﻜﺮﺭ‪ ،‬ﻭﺳﻨﺒﺪﺃ ﺑﺸﺮﺡ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﺋﻨﺎﺕ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﻔﺼﻞ‪:‬‬

‫ﺷﻜﻞ ﺭﻗﻢ)‪(3-59‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬

‫‪.1‬‬ ‫‪.2‬‬ ‫‪.3‬‬ ‫‪.4‬‬

‫‪65‬‬

‫ﺭﺳﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺘﺒﺎﺕ‬

‫ﺗﺘﻴﺢ ﻟﻚ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﺠﺰﺋﻴﺔ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﺇﺟﺮﺍءﺍﺕ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺘﺒﺎﺕ‪.‬‬

‫ﺃﺫﻫﺐ ﻟﻠﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ ﻭﺃﺧﺘﺮ ) ‪ New‬ﺟﺪﻳﺪ( ﺳﺘﻈﻬﺮ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻛﻤﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺸﻜﻞ ﺭﻗﻢ )‪.(3-59‬‬ ‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ‪. Tool‬‬ ‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ‪.Library Painter‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺯﺭ ‪ ،OK‬ﺳﺘﻈﻬﺮ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻛﻤﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺸﻜﻞ ﺭﻗﻢ )‪.(3-60‬‬

‫ﺗﻌﻠﻢ‬



‫ﺳﻴﻈﻬﺮ‬ ‫ﻣﺴﺘﻜﺸﻒ ﺃﻭ‬ ‫ﻣﺤﺮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺘﺒﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﺗﺸﺎﻫﺪ ﺑﺄﻥ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺗﺘﻴﺢ ﻟﻚ‬ ‫ﺇﻣﻜﺎﻧﻴﺎﺕ ﻋﺮﺽ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺘﺒﺎﺕ ﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫ﺍﻷﻗﺮﺍﺹ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺎﺣﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫ﺟﻬﺎﺯﻙ ﻗﻢ‬ ‫ﺑﺎﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺃﺣﺪ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺠﻠﺪﺍﺕ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺰﻧﺔ ﻓﻴﻬﺎ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﻻﺣﻆ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻨﻘﻄﺔ ﺭﻗﻢ ‪1‬‬ ‫ﺳﺘﻈﻬﺮ‬ ‫ﻣﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺘﺒﺔ ﻛﻤﺎ ﻓﻲ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺸﻜﻞ ‪.2‬‬

‫ﺷﻜﻞ ﺭﻗﻢ )‪(3-60‬‬ ‫ﺳﺘﺸﺎﻫﺪ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﻄﺔ ﺭﻗﻢ ‪ 3‬ﺷﺮﻳﻂ ﺍﻷﺩﻭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﻤﺤﺮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺘﺒﺎﺕ‪:‬‬ ‫‪Search‬‬ ‫‪.10‬‬ ‫ﻣﻜﺘﺒﺔ ﺟﺪﻳﺪﺓ‬ ‫‪Create Library‬‬ ‫‪.1‬‬ ‫‪properties‬‬ ‫‪.11‬‬ ‫ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﺠﻤﻴﻊ‬ ‫‪Select All‬‬ ‫‪.2‬‬ ‫‪.12‬‬ ‫ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ‬ ‫‪Edit‬‬ ‫‪.3‬‬ ‫‪Display Most‬‬ ‫ﻧﺴﺦ‬ ‫‪Copy‬‬ ‫‪.4‬‬ ‫‪Resent Object‬‬ ‫ﻧﻘﻞ‬ ‫‪Move‬‬ ‫‪.5‬‬ ‫ﺣﺬﻑ‬ ‫‪Delete‬‬ ‫‪.6‬‬ ‫ﺗﺼﺪﻳﺮ‬ ‫‪Export‬‬ ‫‪.7‬‬ ‫ﺗﻮﺭﻳﺪ‬ ‫‪Import‬‬ ‫‪.8‬‬ ‫ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺇﻧﺸﺎء‬ ‫‪Regenerate‬‬ ‫‪.9‬‬ ‫‪66‬‬

‫ﺑﺤﺚ‬ ‫ﺧﺼﺎﺋﺺ‬ ‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺃﻛﺜﺮ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻜﺎﺋﻨﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﺎ‬

‫ﺗﻌﻠﻢ‬

‫‪3‬‬ ‫‪.1‬‬ ‫‪.2‬‬ ‫‪.3‬‬ ‫‪.4‬‬


‫ﻣﺤﺮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ‬

‫ﺑﻘﻠﻢ‪ :‬ﻣﺤﻤﺪ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺮﻱ‬ ‫ﺗﺘﻴﺢ ﻟﻚ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﺠﺰﺋﻴﺔ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﻭﻓﺘﺢ ﻭﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻨﺼﻴﺔ ﻭﻏﻴﺮﻫﺎ‪.‬‬

‫ﺃﺫﻫﺐ ﻟﻠﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ ﻭﺃﺧﺘﺮ ) ‪ New‬ﺟﺪﻳﺪ( ﺳﺘﻈﻬﺮ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻛﻤﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺸﻜﻞ ﺭﻗﻢ )‪.(3-59‬‬ ‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ‪. Tool‬‬ ‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ‪.File Editor‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺯﺭ ‪ ،OK‬ﺳﺘﻈﻬﺮ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻛﻤﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺸﻜﻞ ﺭﻗﻢ )‪.(3-61‬‬

‫ﺳﻴﻈﻬﺮ ﻟﻚ ﻣﺤﺮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﻭﻫﻮ ﺷﺒﻴﻪ‬ ‫ﺑﺎﻟﻤﻔﻜﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﻨﻈﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻨﻮﺍﻓﺬ ‪Note bad‬‬ ‫‪ -1‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﻜﺘﺎﺑﺔ ﺍﻟﻨﺺ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺮﻳﺪﻩ‬ ‫ﻭﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺣﻔﻈﻪ ﺑﻌﺪﺓ ﺃﻧﻮﺍﻉ ﺃﻧﻈﺮ ﺍﻟﺸﻜﻞ‬ ‫ﺭﻗﻢ )‪.(3-62‬‬

‫‪ - 1‬ﺍﻛﺘﺐ ﺍﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺃﻥ‬ ‫ﺗﺤﻔﻈﻪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ - 2‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻧﻮﻉ ﻣﻦ ﺃﻧﻮﺍﻉ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ - 3‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ‪.SAVE‬‬

‫ﺷﻜﻞ ﺭﻗﻢ )‪(3-61‬‬

‫ﺷﻜﻞ ﺭﻗﻢ )‪(3-62‬‬

‫‪67‬‬

‫ﺗﻌﻠﻢ‬


‫ﻧﺼﻮﺹ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ‬

‫‪4‬‬ ‫‪.1‬‬ ‫‪.2‬‬ ‫‪.3‬‬ ‫‪.4‬‬ ‫‪1‬‬

‫‪2‬‬

‫‪3‬‬

‫‪4‬‬

‫ﺗﺘﻴﺢ ﻟﻚ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﺠﺰﺋﻴﺔ ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﺓ ﻧﺼﻮﺹ ﻛﻞ ﻣﺎ ﻳﺘﻌﻠﻖ ﺑﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻭﻣﺎ‬ ‫ﺗﺤﺘﻮﻳﻪ ﻣﻦ ﻋﻨﺎﺻﺮ ﻭﺑﺈﻣﻜﺎﻧﻚ ﻧﺴﺨﻬﺎ ﻭﺗﻄﺒﻴﻘﻬﺎ ﻣﺒﺎﺷﺮﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ‪.‬‬

‫ﺃﺫﻫﺐ ﻟﻠﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ ﻭﺃﺧﺘﺮ ) ‪ New‬ﺟﺪﻳﺪ( ﺳﺘﻈﻬﺮ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻛﻤﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺸﻜﻞ ﺭﻗﻢ )‪.(3-59‬‬ ‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ‪. Tool‬‬ ‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ‪.Data Window Syntax‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺯﺭ ‪ ،OK‬ﺳﺘﻈﻬﺮ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻛﻤﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺸﻜﻞ ﺭﻗﻢ )‪.(3-63‬‬

‫ ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺃﺣﺪﺙ‬‫ﺍﻟﻌﻨﺎﺻﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‪،‬‬ ‫ﺳﺘﻈﻬﺮ‬ ‫ﺧﺼﺎﺋﺼﻬﺎ ﻛﻤﺎ ﻓﻲ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺠﺰء ﺭﻗﻢ ‪. 2‬‬ ‫ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺇﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭﻙ ﻷﺣﺪ‬‫ﺍﻟﺨﺼﺎﺋﺺ‬ ‫ﺳﺘﻈﻬﺮ ﺻﻴﻐﺔ ﻫﺬﻩ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﻴﺔ ﻛﺄﻣﺮ‬ ‫ﺑﺎﻟـ‪.PB‬‬ ‫ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻷﻣﺮ ﺧﺎﺹ‬‫ﺑﻌﺮﺽ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﻫﺬﻩ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ‬ ‫ﺑﺘﻈﻠﻴﻠﻬﺎ ﻭﻧﺴﺨﻬﺎ‬ ‫ﻭﻟﺼﻘﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺏ‬ ‫ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺠﻚ‪.‬‬ ‫ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻷﻣﺮ ﺧﺎﺹ‬‫ﺑﺘﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﻟﻬﺬﻩ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﻴﺔ ﻗﻢ ﺑﻨﺴﺦ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺴﻄﺮ ﻭﻟﺼﻘﻪ ﻓﻲ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺏ‬ ‫ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺠﻚ‪.‬‬

‫‪68‬‬


‫ﺷﻜﻞ ﺭﻗﻢ )‪.(3-63‬‬

‫ﺗﻌﻠﻢ‬



‫ﺍﻟﻔﺼﻞ ﺍﻟﺮﺍﺑﻊ )ﺍﻟﻜﻮﺩ(‬

‫) ‪(4-1‬‬ ‫ﺇﻧﺸﺎء ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻐﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻑ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻧﻮﺍﻋﻬﺎ‬ ‫) ‪(4-2‬‬ ‫ﺍﻷﻭﺍﻣﺮ ﻭﺍﻟﺠﻤﻞ ‪Statements‬‬ ‫)‪(4-3‬‬ ‫ﺇﻧﺸﺎء ﺍﻟﺪﻭﺍﻝ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺧﻠﻴﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﺨﺎﺭﺟﻴﺔ ‪Function‬‬

‫‪69‬‬

‫ﺗﻌﻠﻢ‬



‫ﻣﻘﺪﻣﻪ‪:‬‬ ‫ﺑﻌﺪ ﺃﻥ ﻋﺮﺿﻨﺎ ﺍﻷﺩﻭﺍﺕ ﻭﺍﻟﻌﻨﺎﺻﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺘﻜﻮﻥ ﻣﻨﻬﺎ ﺍﻟـ ‪ Pb‬ﺳﺄﻗﻮﻡ ﺑﻌﺮﺽ ﺗﻔﺼﻴﻠﻲ ﻛﻴﻒ ﺗﻜﺘﺐ ﺍﻟﻨﺺ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺪﺭﻱ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻜﻮﺩ‬ ‫‪ Code‬ﻭﺳﺘﺸﺎﻫﺪ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺍﻟﺨﺼﺎﺋﺺ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺘﻤﻴﺰ ﺑﻬﺎ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻠﻐﺔ‪:‬‬ ‫‪ - 1‬ﻛﻮﺩ ﺍﻟـ ‪ PB‬ﺷﺒﻴﻪ ﺑﻠﻐﺔ ‪ C‬ﺃﻭ ‪.Java‬‬ ‫‪ - 2‬ﺑﺈﻣﻜﺎﻧﻚ ﺃﻥ ﺗﺨﺘﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺠﻤﻞ ﻭﻟﺼﻘﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﻣﺤﺮﺭ ﺍﻷﻭﺍﻣﺮ‪ ،‬ﺑﺤﻴﺚ ﺗﺘﻴﺢ ﻟﻚ ﺍﻟﻠﻐﺔ ﺍﻟﺠﻤﻞ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻴﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺗﺴﺘﻄﻴﻊ‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭﻫﺎ ﻣﺒﺎﺷﺮﺓ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻌﺪﻳﻞ ﻋﻠﻴﻬﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ - 3‬ﺇﻣﻜﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺩﻭﺍﻝ ﻣﺒﻨﻴﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻠﻐﺔ ﻣﺴﺒﻘﺎ ً ﻭﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻬﺎ ﻣﺒﺎﺷﺮﺓ ﻓﻲ ﻣﺤﺮﺭ ﺍﻷﻭﺍﻣﺮ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ Data Window Object‬ﻋﻦ ﻁﺮﻳﻖ ﺑﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺒﻴﺮ‬ ‫‪ - 4‬ﺑﺈﻣﻜﺎﻧﻚ ﻛﺘﺎﺑﺔ ﻛﻮﺩ ﻓﻲ ﻧﻔﺲ ﻛﺎﺋﻦ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ‬ ‫‪.Expression Builder‬‬ ‫‪ - 5‬ﺇﻣﻜﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﺑﻨﺎء ﺟﻤﻠﺔ ‪ SQL Statement‬ﻋﻦ ﻁﺮﻳﻖ ‪ SQL Builder‬ﺑﺴﺮﻋﺔ ﻭﺳﻬﻮﻟﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ - 6‬ﺇﻣﻜﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﺗﻔﻌﻴﻞ ‪ Auto Script‬ﺍﻟﻨﺺ ﺍﻵﻟﻲ ﻋﻨﺪ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﻄﺔ )‪ (.‬ﺳﻮﻑ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﺨﺼﺎﺋﺺ ﻭﺍﻟﺪﻭﺍﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺑﻌﺔ‬ ‫ﻟﻠﻜﺎﺋﻦ ﺑﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻣﻨﺴﺪﻟﺔ ﺗﺴﻬﻞ ﻋﻠﻴﻚ ﻛﺘﺎﺑﺔ ﺍﻷﻭﺍﻣﺮ‪.‬‬

‫)‪ (4-1‬ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻐﻴﺮﺍﺕ )‪ (Variables‬ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻑ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻧﻮﺍﻋﻬﺎ‪:‬‬

‫ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻐﻴﺮﺍﺕ )‪ :(Variables‬ﻫﻲ ﻋﺒﺎﺭﺓ ﻋﻦ ﺃﻭﻋﻴﺔ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺤﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﻭﻏﻴﺮﻫﺎ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﻭﺗﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﻣﺆﻗﺖ ﻟﻠﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺇﻣﺎ ﻋﻦ ﻁﺮﻳﻖ ﻗﺮﺍءﺓ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻣﻦ ﻗﺎﻋﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺃﻭ ﻋﻦ ﻁﺮﻳﻖ ﺷﺎﺷﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺃﻭ ﻁﺮﻕ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺃﻧﻮﺍﻉ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻐﻴﺮﺍﺕ‪:‬‬ ‫‪-1‬‬ ‫‪Blob‬‬ ‫‪Boolean - 2‬‬ ‫‪-3‬‬ ‫‪Char or character‬‬

‫‪-4‬‬ ‫‪Date‬‬ ‫‪-5‬‬

‫‪DateTime‬‬

‫‪-6‬‬

‫‪Decimal or Dec‬‬

‫‪70‬‬

‫ﻋﺒﺎﺭﺓ ﻋﻦ ﻛﺎﺋﻦ ﺛﻨﺎﺋﻲ )‪ (Binary‬ﺿﺨﻢ‪ ،‬ﻳﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻟﺘﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﺤﺪﻭﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﻴﺔ )ﻣﻔﺘﻮﺡ(‬ ‫ﻣﺜﺎﻝ‪:‬‬ ‫)ﺻﻮﺭﺓ‪ ،‬ﻭﺛﻴﻘﺔ ﻭﻭﺭﺩ(‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﺤﺘﻮﻱ ﺇﻣﺎ ‪ True‬ﺃﻭ ‪.False‬‬ ‫ﺣﺮﻑ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺟﺪﻭﻝ ‪ASCII‬‬ ‫ﻣﺜﺎﻝ‪:‬‬ ‫‪Char C‬‬ ‫'‪C = 'T‬‬ ‫"‪C = "T‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ‪ :‬ﻳﺤﺘﻮﻱ ﺍﻟﺴﻨﺔ ﻛﺎﻣﻠﺔ )‪ 1000‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ ،(3000‬ﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﺸﻬﻮﺭ )‪ 1‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ ،(12‬ﺍﻷﻳﺎﻡ )‪ 1‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪.(31‬‬ ‫ﻣﺜﺎﻝ‪:‬‬ ‫‪December 25, 1992 // 25-12-1992‬‬ ‫‪February 6, 1995 // 06-02-1995‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﻭﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﻓﻲ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ‪ ،‬ﻳﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻓﻘﻂ ﻟﻘﺮﺍءﺓ ﻭﻛﺘﺎﺑﺔ ﻗﻴﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﻭﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﻣﻦ ﻭﺇﻟﻰ‬ ‫ﻗﺎﻋﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ‪ ،‬ﻟﺘﺤﻮﻳﻞ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﻭﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺃﻧﻮﺍﻉ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟـ ‪ Pb‬ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ‪:‬‬ ‫• )‪ :Date(datetime‬ﺩﺍﻟﺔ ﻟﺘﺤﻮﻳﻞ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ‪ DateTime‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ Date‬ﺃﻭ ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ‪ ،‬ﺑﻌﺪ‬ ‫ﻗﺮﺍءﺗﻬﺎ ﻣﻦ ﻗﺎﻋﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ‪.‬‬ ‫• )‪ :Time(DateTime‬ﺩﺍﻟﺔ ﻟﺘﺤﻮﻳﻞ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ‪ DateTime‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ Time‬ﺃﻭ ﻭﻗﺖ‪ ،‬ﺑﻌﺪ‬ ‫ﻗﺮﺍءﺗﻬﺎ ﻣﻦ ﻗﺎﻋﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ‪.‬‬ ‫• )‪ :DateTime(Date, Time‬ﺩﺍﻟﺔ ﻟﺘﺤﻮﻳﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﻭﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ )ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭﻱ( ﺇﻟﻰ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ‬ ‫‪ DateTime‬ﻗﺒﻞ ﻛﺘﺎﺑﺘﻬﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻗﺎﻋﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺭﻗﻢ ﻋﺸﺮﻱ )‪ (-/+‬ﺣﺘﻰ ‪ 18‬ﺧﺎﻧﺔ ﻭﺑﺈﻣﻜﺎﻧﻚ ﻧﻘﻞ ﺍﻟﻔﺎﺻﻠﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺸﺮﻳﺔ ﻟﺤﺪ ‪ 18‬ﺧﺎﻧﺔ ﻣﺜﺎﻝ‪:‬‬ ‫‪123,456‬‬ ‫‪0.000000000000000001‬‬ ‫‪12345678901234.5678‬‬ ‫ﻫﻨﺎﻙ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺍﻟﺼﻴﻎ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺸﺎﺑﻬﺔ ﻭﻫﻲ‪:‬‬ ‫• ‪ 95‬ﺃﻭ ‪ +95‬ﻫﻲ ﻧﻔﺲ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ‬ ‫• ‪ 0.1‬ﺃﻭ ‪ .1‬ﻫﻲ ﻧﻔﺲ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ‬ ‫• ‪ 32.00‬ﺃﻭ ‪ 32.0‬ﺃﻭ ‪ 32.‬ﻫﻲ ﻧﻔﺲ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ‪.‬‬

‫ﺗﻌﻠﻢ‬


‫‪-7‬‬ ‫‪Double‬‬

‫‪Integer or Int - 8‬‬ ‫‪Long - 9‬‬ ‫‪LongLong - 10‬‬ ‫‪- 11‬‬ ‫‪Real‬‬

‫‪- 12‬‬

‫ﺑﻘﻠﻢ‪ :‬ﻣﺤﻤﺪ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺮﻱ‬ ‫ﺭﻗﻢ ﻋﺎﺋﻢ )‪ (-/+‬ﺑـ ‪ 15‬ﺧﺎﻧﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺪﻗﺔ ﻭﻣﺠﺎﻝ‬ ‫ﻣﻦ‬ ‫‪2.2250738585073E-308‬‬ ‫ﺇﻟﻰ‬ ‫‪1.79769313486231E+308‬‬ ‫‪ 16-Bit‬ﺻﺤﻴﺢ ﻣﻦ ‪ -32768‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪+32768‬‬ ‫‪ 32-Bit‬ﺻﺤﻴﺢ ﻣﻦ ‪ -2,147,483,648‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪+2,147,483,647‬‬ ‫‪ 64-Bit‬ﺻﺤﻴﺢ ﻣﻦ ‪ -9223372036854775808‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪9223372036854775807‬‬ ‫ﺭﻗﻢ ﻋﺎﺋﻢ )‪ (-/+‬ﺑـ ‪ 6‬ﺧﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺪﻗﺔ ﻭﻣﺠﺎﻝ‬ ‫ﻣﻦ‬ ‫‪1.175495E-38‬‬ ‫ﺇﻟﻰ‬ ‫‪3.402822E+38‬‬ ‫ﺃﻱ ﺣﺮﻑ ‪ ASCII‬ﺑﻄﻮﻝ ﻣﺘﻐﻴﺮ )‪ 0‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ ،(2,147,483,647‬ﻣﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻘﻚ ﻟﻠﺤﺮﻭﻑ‬ ‫ﻛﺎﻷﺳﻤﺎء‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﻌﻨﺎﻭﻳﻦ‪ ،‬ﻭﻫﻜﺬﺍ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻭﺗﻮﻓﺮ ﻟﻐﺔ ﺍﻟـ ‪ Pb‬ﺩﻭﺍﻝ ﻋﺪﻳﺪﺓ ﻟﻤﻌﺎﻟﺠﺔ ﺍﻟـ ‪ String‬ﻣﺜﺎﻝ ﺩﺍﻟﺔ ﺗﺤﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﻭﻑ ﻟﻠﺤﺮﻭﻑ ﺍﻟﻜﺒﻴﺮﺓ ‪a‬‬ ‫ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ ،A‬ﻭﺩﺍﻟﺔ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺈﻟﻐﺎء ﺍﻟﻔﺮﺍﻏﺎﺕ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﻭﻑ‪.‬‬ ‫‪string s1‬‬ ‫'‪s1 = 'This is a string‬‬ ‫"‪s1 = "This is a string‬‬

‫‪String‬‬

‫ﻭﺑﺈﻣﻜﺎﻧﻚ ﺗﻀﻤﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻌﻼﻣﺔ )'( ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟـ‪ String‬ﻣﺜﺎﻝ‪:‬‬ ‫‪Here's a string:‬‬ ‫‪string s1‬‬ ‫‪s1 = "Here's a string".‬‬ ‫ﺃﻭ ﺑﺈﻣﻜﺎﻧﻚ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻌﻼﻣﺔ )~( ﻟﺘﻀﻤﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻌﻼﻣﺔ)'( ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﺍﻟـ ‪ String‬ﻣﺜﺎﻝ‪:‬‬ ‫"'‪string s1 = 'He said, "It~'s good‬‬

‫‪- 13‬‬

‫‪Time‬‬

‫‪UnsignedInteger, - 14‬‬ ‫‪UnsignedInt, or‬‬ ‫‪UInt‬‬ ‫‪UnsignedLong or - 15‬‬ ‫‪ULong‬‬

‫ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﻓﻲ ﺻﻴﻐﺔ ‪ 24‬ﺳﺎﻋﺔ ‪ ،‬ﻳﻀﻢ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﻋﺎﺕ )‪ 00‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ (23‬ﺍﻟﺪﻗﺎﺋﻖ )‪ 00‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ (59‬ﺍﻟﺜﻮﺍﻧﻲ )‪ 00‬ﺇﻟﻰ‬ ‫‪ (59‬ﻭﺟﺰء ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ 6‬ﺧﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻣﻦ ‪ 00:00:00‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪23:59:59.999999‬‬ ‫ﺃﻣﺜﻠﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ‪:‬‬ ‫‪21:09:15‬‬ ‫‪ 15‬ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﻋﺔ ‪= 9:09 pm‬‬ ‫‪6:00:00‬‬ ‫ﺗﻤﺎﻣﺎ ً ‪= 6 am‬‬ ‫‪10:29:59‬‬ ‫ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﻋﺔ ‪= 10:30 am‬‬ ‫‪ 10/1‬ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﻋﺔ ‪10:29:59.9sec = 10:30 am‬‬ ‫‪16-Bit‬ﺻﺤﻴﺢ ﻣﻦ ﻏﻴﺮ ﺇﺷﺎﺭﺓ )‪ (-/+‬ﻣﻦ ‪ 0‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪65,535‬‬ ‫‪ 32-Bit‬ﺻﺤﻴﺢ ﻣﻦ ﺩﻭﻥ ﺇﺷﺎﺭﺓ )‪ ( -/+‬ﻣﻦ ‪ 0‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪4,294,967,295‬‬

‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﻋﻨﺪﻙ ﺧﺒﺮﺓ ﻭﻋﻤﻠﺖ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻟﻐﺎﺕ ﺑﺮﻣﺠﺔ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﺳﺘﺠﺪ ﺑﺄﻧﻚ ﻗﺮﻳﺐ ﻣﻤﺎ ﺷﺮﺣﻨﺎﻩ ﺳﺎﺑﻘﺎ ً ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻐﻴﺮﺍﺕ‪ ،‬ﻻ ﻳﻮﺟﺪ‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﻼﻑ ﺇﻻ ﻟﺒﻌﺾ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﻤﻴﺎﺕ‪.‬‬

‫‪71‬‬

‫ﺗﻌﻠﻢ‬



‫)‪ (4-2‬ﺍﻷﻭﺍﻣﺮ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺠﻤﻞ ‪:Statements or Commands‬‬

‫ﺍﻷﻭﺍﻣﺮ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺠﻤﻞ ﻫﻲ ﺍﻟﻠﻐﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﺴﺘﻄﻴﻊ ﺃﻥ ﻳﻤﻠﻴﻬﺎ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺮﻣﺞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﺳﻮﺏ ﻟﻴﺤﻘﻖ ﻧﺘﻴﺠﺔ ﻣﻌﻴﻨﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺇﺩﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﻗﺎﻋﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﻜﻞ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﻳﻌﻤﻞ ﺗﺤﺖ ﺑﻴﺌﺔ ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﻭﻫﻨﺎ ﻳﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺮﻣﺠﻮﻥ ﺣﺴﺐ ﺭﺅﻳﺘﻬﻢ‬ ‫ﻟﻠﻤﺸﻜﻠﺔ ﻭﺗﺼﻮﺭﻫﻢ ﻟﻠﺤﻞ ﺍﻷﻣﺜﻞ‪ ،‬ﻭﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺃﻥ ﻧﺴﺄﻝ ﺍﻟﺴﺆﺍﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ‪:‬‬ ‫ﺳﺆﺍﻝ( ﻣﺎ ﻫﻲ ﺍﻟﻌﻮﺍﻣﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺆﺛﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺇﻳﺠﺎﺩ ﺍﻟﺤﻞ ﺍﻷﻣﺜﻞ ﻟﻤﺴﺄﻟﺔ ﺑﺮﻣﺠﻴﺔ؟‬ ‫ﺟﻮﺍﺏ( ﻫﻨﺎﻙ ﻋﺪﺓ ﻋﻮﺍﻣﻞ ﺗﺆﺛﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺤﻞ ﻭﻫﻲ‪:‬‬ ‫• ﺧﺒﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺮﻣﺞ ﺑﺄﺩﻭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻠﻐﺔ ﻫﻞ ﻫﻮ ﻣﻠﻢ ﺑﺄﻏﻠﺐ ﺃﺩﻭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻠﻐﺔ ﻭﺍﻷﻭﺍﻣﺮ ﻭﺍﻟﺠﻤﻞ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﻟﺪﺭﺍﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻓﻴﺔ ﺑﺈﻣﻜﺎﻧﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻠﻐﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺧﺒﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺮﻣﺞ ﻓﻲ ﻣﺠﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺮﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﻄﺒﻖ ﻓﻴﻪ ﻣﺸﺮﻭﻋﻪ ﻭﺳﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻞ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﺘﺮﺟﻤﻪ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ‪ ،‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﺩﺭﺳﺖ‬ ‫ﻭﺣﻠﻠﺖ ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ﻋﻤﻞ ﻣﻌﻴﻦ ﻷﺣﺪ ﺍﻷﻧﺸﻄﺔ ﻭﻛﻨﺖ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺩﺭﺍﻳﺔ ﻛﺒﻴﺮﺓ ﺑﻄﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﻋﻤﻞ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻨﺸﺎﻁ ﺳﺘﻜﻮﻥ ﻟﺪﻳﻚ ﻓﺮﺻﺔ ﺃﻛﺒﺮ‬ ‫ﻟﺘﺠﺴﻴﺪ ﺍﻟﻨﺸﺎﻁ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻷﺩﻭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻠﻴﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺮﻓﻴﺔ ﻻﺳﺘﻨﺘﺎﺝ ﺍﻟﺤﻞ ﺍﻷﻣﺜﻞ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺍﻟﺮﺅﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻘﺒﻠﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﺤﻞ‪ ،‬ﻭﻭﺿﻮﺡ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﺮﺅﻳﺎ ﺗﻌﻄﻲ ﺷﻤﻮﻟﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﺤﻞ ﺗﻮﻓﺮ ﻋﻠﻴﻚ ﻋﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺪﻳﻼﺕ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻘﺒﻞ‬ ‫ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﻠﺤﻮﻅ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻭﻻ ﺑﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺃﻥ ﺃﻋﻄﻲ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺍﻟﻨﺼﺎﺋﺢ ﻓﻲ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺒﺎﺏ ﻭﻟﻜﻮﻧﻚ ﺳﺘﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺈﻧﺸﺎء ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺠﻚ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﻠﻐﺔ ‪ PB‬ﺇﻥ ﺷﺎء ﷲ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺃﻥ‬ ‫ﺗﻘﺮﺃ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻜﺘﺎﺏ ﻭﻣﻦ ﺃﻫﻢ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻨﺼﺎﺋﺢ‪:‬‬ ‫‪ .1‬ﺗﺮﺗﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﺠﻤﻞ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻣﺠﻴﺔ ﺑﺤﻴﺚ ﻳﺴﻬﻞ ﺗﺘﺒﻌﻬﺎ ﺩﻭﻥ ﻋﻨﺎء‪ ،‬ﻟﺘﻜﻮﻥ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻫﻴﺌﺔ ﻗﻄﺎﻋﺎﺕ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .2‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﻠﻴﻘﺎﺕ ﺑﻜﺜﺮﺓ ﻟﺘﻜﻮﻥ ﻟﻚ ﻭﻟﻐﻴﺮﻙ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺮﻣﺠﻴﻦ ﺇﺷﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺗﻮﺿﻴﺤﻴﺔ ﺗﻌﻄﻴﻚ ﻟﻤﺤﺔ ﺳﺮﻳﻌﺔ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ‬ ‫ﻭﺍﻟﻤﺪﺧﻼﺕ ﻭﺍﻟﻤﺨﺮﺟﺎﺕ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .3‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻮﻗﻴﻊ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻋﻤﻠﻚ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺼﻨﻌﻪ ﺑﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﺳﻤﻚ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﺠﺰﺋﻴﺔ ﻟﻤﻌﺮﻓﺔ ﻣﻦ ﻫﻮ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺑﻨﺎﻫﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻝ‬ ‫ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺃﻛﺜﺮ ﻣﻦ ﻣﺒﺮﻣﺞ ﻳﻌﻤﻠﻮﻥ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺑﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .4‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻄﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺠﻚ ﻓﻲ ﺣﻴﻦ ﺍﻛﺘﺸﻔﺖ ﺃﺩﺍﺓ ﺃﻭ ﺟﻤﻠﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺩﺍﻟﺔ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﻨﻔﺲ ﺍﻟﺠﺰﺋﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺑﻨﻴﺘﻬﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .5‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺨﺼﻴﺺ ﻭﻗﺖ ﻳﻮﻣﻲ ﻟﻘﺮﺍءﺓ ﻣﻮﺿﻮﻉ ﻓﻲ ﺟﺰﺋﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺎﻋﺪﺓ ‪ Help‬ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﻓﻲ ﻟﻐﺔ ﺍﻟـ ‪ PB‬ﻟﻠﺘﻮﺳﻴﻊ ﻣﺠﺎﻝ‬ ‫ﻣﻌﺮﻓﺘﻚ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻠﻐﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .6‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺰﻳﺎﺭﺓ ﻣﻮﻗﻊ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﻛﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺠﺔ ﻟﻠﻐﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻣﺠﺔ ﻭﺍﻹﻁﻼﻉ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺁﺧﺮ ﺍﻷﺧﺒﺎﺭ ﻭﺍﻹﺻﺪﺍﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺠﺪﻳﺪﺓ ﻟﻠﻐﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻣﺠﺔ‬ ‫ﻟﻤﻮﺍﻛﺒﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻄﻮﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺠﺪﻳﺪﺓ‪.‬‬

‫‪72‬‬

‫ﺗﻌﻠﻢ‬



‫ﺟﻤﻠﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﻟﻠﻤﺘﻐﻴﺮﺍﺕ ‪Assignment Statement‬‬

‫ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻒ ‪:Description‬‬

‫ﻫﻮ ﺗﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﻣﻌﻴﻨﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻣﺘﻐﻴﺮ ﺃﻭ ﻓﻲ ﺧﺼﺎﺋﺺ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﺋﻨﺎﺕ ﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﺎﺕ ﺑﺮﻣﺠﻴﺔ ﻭﺗﻌﺘﺒﺮ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﺠﻤﻠﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺃﺑﺴﻂ ﺍﻟﺠﻤﻞ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻣﺠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻬﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺼﻴﻐﺔ ‪:Syntax‬‬ ‫‪variablename = expression‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺒﻴﺮ = ﺍﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻐﻴﺮ‬ ‫ﺍﻹﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ‪: Usage‬‬ ‫ﻹﺳﻨﺎﺩ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﻟﻠﻤﺘﻐﻴﺮ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺇﺷﺎﺭﺓ )=(‪ ،‬ﻣﺜﺎﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺫﻟﻚ‪:‬‬ ‫" ‪String1 = "Part is out of stock‬‬ ‫‪TaxRate = .05‬‬ ‫ﻻ ﺗﻮﺟﺪ ﺟﻤﻞ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﻣﺮﻛﺒﺔ‬ ‫ﻭﺑﻤﺎ ﺃﻥ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺎﻭﺍﺓ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﻴﺔ ﺃﻳﻀﺎً‪ ،‬ﻻ ﺗﺴﺘﻄﻴﻊ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺃﻛﺜﺮ ﻣﻦ ﻣﺘﻐﻴﺮ ﻓﻲ ﺟﻤﻠﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ ﻻﺣﻆ ﺍﻟﻤﺜﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ‪:‬‬ ‫‪A=B=0‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻢ ‪ 0‬ﻟﻦ ﻳﻌﻴﻦ ﻟﻠﻤﺘﻐﻴﺮﻳﻦ ‪A‬ﻭ ‪B‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺠﻤﻠﺔ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺎﺣﺘﺴﺎﺏ ‪ B=0‬ﻟﻠﻘﻴﻢ ‪ True‬ﺃﻭ ‪ False‬ﻭﻣﻦ ﺛﻢ ﻣﺤﺎﻭﻟﺔ ﺇﺳﻨﺎﺩ ﺍﻟﻨﺘﻴﺠﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻄﻘﻴﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻐﻴﺮ ‪ ،A‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻐﻴﺮ ‪ A‬ﻟﻴﺲ ﻣﻦ ﻧﻮﻉ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﻲ ‪ Boolean‬ﻓﺈﻥ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻔﻴﺬ ﺳﻴﻌﻄﻲ ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﺧﻄﺄ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﻗﻴﻢ ﻟﻠﻤﺼﻔﻮﻓﺔ‪:‬‬ ‫ﺗﺴﺘﻄﻴﻊ ﺇﺳﻨﺎﺩ ﺃﻛﺜﺮ ﻣﻦ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﻟﻠﻤﺼﻔﻮﻓﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺟﻤﻠﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ‪ ،‬ﻣﺜﺎﻝ‪:‬‬ ‫][‪ int Arr‬ﺗﻌﺮﻳﻒ ﻣﺼﻔﻮﻓﺔ ﻣﻦ ﻧﻮﻉ ‪ Integer‬ﻭﻫﺬﺍ ﻳﻌﻨﻲ ﺗﻌﺮﻳﻒ ﻣﺼﻔﻮﻓﺔ ﻣﻔﺘﻮﺣﺔ‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺤﺪﻭﺩ ﻭﺗﻘﺒﻞ ﻗﻴﻢ ‪ integer‬ﻓﻘﻂ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ int‬ﻫﻲ ﺍﺧﺘﺼﺎﺭ ﻟﻠﻨﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ‪.integer‬‬ ‫}‪ Arr = {1, 2, 3, 4‬ﺟﻤﻠﺔ ﺍﻹﺳﻨﺎﺩ ﻭﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺈﺳﻨﺎﺩ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻷﺭﻗﺎﻡ ﺩﻓﻌﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ ﻟﻠﻤﺼﻔﻮﻓﺔ‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫‪ Arr2‬ﺇﻟﻰ‬

‫ﺗﺴﺘﻄﻴﻊ ﻧﺴﺦ ﻣﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﻣﺼﻔﻮﻓﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪ ،‬ﻣﺜﺎﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺫﻟﻚ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻤﺜﺎﻝ ﻳﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﻨﺴﺦ ﻣﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﻔﻮﻓﺔ‬ ‫‪.Arr1‬‬ ‫‪Arr1 = Arr2‬‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﺼﺎﺭ ﻟﻠﻌﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ‪:Operation Shortcuts‬‬ ‫ﻣﺴﺎﻭﻳﺔ ﻟـ ‪Equivalent To‬‬ ‫ﻣﺜﺎﻝ ‪Example‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻌﻴﻴﻦ ‪Assignment‬‬ ‫‪No‬‬ ‫‪i=i+1‬‬ ‫‪i++‬‬ ‫‪++‬‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫‪i=i-1‬‬ ‫‪i-‬‬‫‪-‬‬‫‪2‬‬ ‫‪i=i+3‬‬ ‫‪i +=3‬‬ ‫=‪+‬‬ ‫‪3‬‬ ‫‪i=i-3‬‬ ‫‪i -=3‬‬ ‫=‪-‬‬ ‫‪4‬‬ ‫‪i=i*3‬‬ ‫‪i *=3‬‬ ‫=*‬ ‫‪5‬‬ ‫‪i=i/3‬‬ ‫‪i /=3‬‬ ‫=‪/‬‬ ‫‪6‬‬ ‫‪i=i^3‬‬ ‫‪i ^=3‬‬ ‫=^‬ ‫‪7‬‬

‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﻫﻨﺎﻙ ﻓﺎﺋﺪﺓ ﻣﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻚ ‪ (-) Dash‬ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻐﻴﺮ ﻻ ﺑﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺃﻥ ﺗﺠﻌﻞ ﻣﺴﺎﻓﺔ ﺑﻴﻨﻬﺎ ﻭﺑﻴﻦ )‪ (--‬ﺃﻭ )=‪ ،(-‬ﺇﻥ ﻟﻢ ﺗﻔﻌﻞ‬ ‫ﺳﻴﻌﺘﺒﺮ ﺍﻟـ ‪ Power Script‬ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﻄﺮﺡ ﺟﺰء ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻐﻴﺮ‪.‬‬ ‫‪73‬‬

‫ﺗﻌﻠﻢ‬



‫ﺃﺭﺟﻮﺍ ﺍﻻﻧﺘﺒﺎﻩ ﻟﻬﺬﻩ ﺍﻷﻣﺜﻠﺔ‪:‬‬ ‫‪ .1‬ﺳﻨﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺘﻌﺮﻳﻒ ﻣﺘﻐﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﻣﻦ ﻧﻮﻉ ‪ Integer‬ﻭﻧﺴﻨﺪ ﺇﻟﻴﻬﺎ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﻭﻧﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﻌﻤﻞ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺤﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ‬

‫‪1‬‬

‫‪2‬‬ ‫‪3‬‬ ‫‪4‬‬ ‫‪5‬‬

‫ﺗﻼﺣﻆ ﻗﻤﻨﺎ ﺑﺘﻌﺮﻳﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻐﻴﺮﺍﺕ ‪ ii_no3 ،ii_no2 ،ii_no1‬ﻛﺄﺭﻗﺎﻡ‬ ‫ﻭﻗﻤﻨﺎ ﺑﺘﻌﺮﻳﻒ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻮﺳﻂ ﺍﻟﺤﺴﺎﺑﻲ ﻟﻸﺭﻗﺎﻡ ﺃﻋﻼﻩ ‪ii_avg :‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺠﻤﻮﻉ ﻟﻸﺭﻗﺎﻡ ﺃﻋﻼﻩ ‪ii_sum :‬‬ ‫ﻁﺮﺡ ﺍﻷﺭﻗﺎﻡ ﺃﻋﻼﻩ ‪ii_sub :‬‬ ‫ﻫﺬﻩ ﻫﻲ ﺟﻤﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺑﺤﻴﺚ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺈﺳﻨﺎﺩ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺑﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻐﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺮﻑ‬ ‫ﻣﺴﺒﻘﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ﺭﻗﻢ ‪ 1‬ﺃﻋﻼﻩ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ = ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻐﻴﺮ‬ ‫ﻫﺬﻩ ﺟﻤﻠﺔ ﺍﺣﺘﺴﺎﺏ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﻤﻮﻉ ﻟﻠﻤﺘﻐﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﻭﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺣﺎﺻﻞ ﺍﻟﺠﻤﻊ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻐﻴﺮ‬ ‫‪ii_sum‬‬ ‫ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﺠﻤﻠﺔ ﻻﺣﺘﺴﺎﺏ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻮﺳﻂ ﺍﻟﺤﺴﺎﺑﻲ ﻟﻠﻤﺘﻐﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﺃﻋﻼﻩ ﻭﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻨﺘﻴﺠﺔ ﻓﻲ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻐﻴﺮ ‪ii_avg‬‬ ‫ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﺠﻤﻠﺔ ﻻﺣﺘﺴﺎﺏ ﺣﺎﺻﻞ ﻁﺮﺡ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻐﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﺃﻋﻼﻩ ﻭﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻨﺘﻴﺠﺔ ﻓﻲ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻐﻴﺮ ‪ii_sub‬‬

‫‪ .2‬ﻋﻤﻞ ﻋﺪﺍﺩ ‪:Counter‬‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﻋﻤﻞ ﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺗﺼﺎﻋﺪﻱ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻨﺎﻗﺼﻲ ﻟﻤﺘﻐﻴﺮ ﻣﺎ ﻭﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺯﻳﺎﺩﺗﻪ ﺃﻭ ﺇﻧﻘﺎﺻﻪ ﺑﻤﻘﺪﺍﺭ ﺛﺎﺑﺖ‪ ،‬ﺃﻧﻈﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻴﻐﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻣﺔ‬ ‫ﻟﻠﻌﺪﺍﺩ‪:‬‬ ‫ﺭﻗﻢ )‪-‬ﺃﻭ‪ (+‬ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻐﻴﺮ = ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻐﻴﺮ‬ ‫‪-) n‬ﺃﻭ‪ll_counter = ll_counter (+‬‬ ‫‪1‬‬

‫ﻗﻤﻨﺎ ﺑﺘﻌﺮﻳﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻐﻴﺮ ‪ ll_counter‬ﻣﻦ ﻧﻮﻉ ‪Long‬‬ ‫ﺟﻤﻠﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺍﺩ‪ ،‬ﻻﺣﻆ ﺍﻟﺸﻜﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ ‪:‬‬

‫ﺗﺠﺪ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻟﺠﺰء ﺭﻗﻢ ‪ 1‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻨﻔﻴﺬﻩ ﺃﻭﻻً ﺛﻢ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﻧﺘﻴﺠﺔ ﺍﻟﺠﺰء ﺭﻗﻢ ‪ 1‬ﻓﻲ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺠﺰء ﺭﻗﻢ ‪ ، 2‬ﻭﻫﻲ ﻗﺎﻋﺪﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺟﻤﻠﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﻟﻜﻞ ﻟﻐﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻣﺠﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬

‫ﺃﻧﻈﺮ ﺍﻟﺸﻜﻞ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ ﻟﻤﻌﺮﻓﺔ ﺁﻟﻴﺔ ﺍﺣﺘﺴﺎﺏ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺍﺩ‬

‫‪3‬‬

‫ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﺠﻤﻠﺔ ﺗﺆﺩﻱ ﻧﻔﺲ ﻋﻤﻞ ﺍﻟﺠﻤﻠﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺧﻄﻮﺓ ﺭﻗﻢ ‪ 2‬ﻭﻫﻲ ﺑﺼﻴﻐﺔ ﻟﻐﺔ ‪C‬‬

‫ﻭﺑﻨﻔﺲ ﺍﻟﻄﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺃﻥ ﺗﻄﺒﻖ ﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺗﻨﺎﺯﻟﻲ ﻭﺫﻟﻚ ﺑﺘﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﺍﻹﺷﺎﺭﺓ )‪ (+‬ﺇﻟﻰ )‪ ،(-‬ﻭﺑﺈﻣﻜﺎﻧﻚ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻪ ﻓﻲ ﻛﺜﻴﺮ ﻣﻦ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺍﻗﻒ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻣﺠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺤﺘﺎﺝ ﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺍﺩ‪.‬‬

‫‪74‬‬

‫ﺗﻌﻠﻢ‬



‫ﺍﻟﺠﻤﻞ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﻁﻴﺔ ‪:Condition Statement‬‬

‫ﺃﻱ ﻟﻐﺔ ﺳﻮﺍء ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﻟﻐﺔ ﺑﺸﺮﻳﺔ ﺃﻡ ﻟﻐﺔ ﺑﺮﻣﺠﻴﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺻﻨﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﺸﺮ ﺗﺘﻜﻮﻥ ﻣﻦ ﺟﻤﻞ ﻭﻣﻦ ﺃﻫﻢ ﺍﻟﺠﻤﻞ ﻫﻲ ﺍﻟﺠﻤﻞ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺸﺮﻁﻴﺔ ﻭﻫﻲ ﻧﻮﻉ ﻣﻦ ﺗﻮﺯﻳﻊ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻞ ﺣﺴﺐ ﺷﺮﻁ ﻣﻌﻴﻦ ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﺤﻘﻖ ﻳﻨﻔﺬ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺏ ﻭﺇﻥ ﻟﻢ ﻳﺘﺤﻘﻖ ﺃﻣﺎ ﻳﻨﺘﻘﻞ ﻟﻠﺠﻤﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﺃﻭ ﻳﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﻌﻤﻞ ﺁﺧﺮ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻭﺑﻤﺎ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻟﻐﺮﺏ ﻫﻢ ﻣﻦ ﻁﻮﺭﻭﺍ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻠﻐﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻣﺠﻴﺔ ﻛﺎﻥ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﻴﻌﻲ ﺃﻥ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺻﻴﻎ ﺍﻟﺠﻤﻞ ﺑﺎﻹﻧﺠﻠﻴﺰﻳﺔ ﻭﻟﻴﺴﺖ‬ ‫ﺑﺎﻟﻌﺮﺑﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﻣﻊ ﺃﻧﻪ ﺗﻮﺟﺪ ﺑﻌﺾ ﻟﻐﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻣﺠﺔ ﻣﺤﺪﻭﺩﺓ ﺍﻹﻣﻜﺎﻧﻴﺎﺕ ﺗﻜﺘﺐ ﺃﻭﺍﻣﺮﻫﺎ ﺑﺎﻟﻠﻐﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺑﻴﺔ ﻭﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﺪﺍﺭﺱ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻮﺳﻄﺔ ﻟﻠﺘﺪﺭﻳﺐ ﻭﻛﻤﺪﺧﻞ ﻟﻠﺒﺮﻣﺠﺔ ﻭﺑﺈﻣﻜﺎﻧﻚ ﻛﺘﺎﺑﺔ ﺃﻭﺍﻣﺮ ﺑﺎﻟﻌﺮﺑﻴﺔ ﻣﺜﺎﻝ(‬ ‫ﺃﻣﺎﻡ ‪ ،100‬ﻳﻤﻴﻦ ‪ ،50‬ﺧﻠﻒ ‪50‬‬ ‫ﻭﻳﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺮﺳﻢ ﺷﻜﻞ ﻣﻌﻴﻦ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﺷﺮ ﻟﻠﻨﻘﻄﺔ ﺇﺣﺪﺍﺛﻴﺎﺕ ﺟﺪﻳﺪﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺣﺘﻰ ﻳﻤﻦ ﷲ ﻋﻠﻴﻨﺎ ﻭﻧﺼﺒﺢ ﻣﻦ ﻣﻨﺘﺠﻲ ﻟﻐﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻣﺠﺔ‪ ،‬ﻣﺎ ﻋﻠﻴﻨﺎ ﺇﻻ ﺃﻥ ﻧﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻠﻐﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﺎﻝ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻴﻂ ﺑﻨﺎ ﻭﻳﺠﺐ ﺃﻥ ﻧﺒﺪﻉ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻬﺎ ﻟﻨﻐﻄﻲ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺧﻴﺒﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﻣﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻼﺣﻘﻨﺎ ﻭﺗﻘﺼﻴﺮﻧﺎ ﺑﺤﻖ ﻋﻠﻤﺎﺋﻨﺎ ﺍﻟﻘﺪﺍﻣﻰ‪.‬‬

‫‪IF … THEN PowerScript Statement .1‬‬

‫ﺍﻟﺠﻤﻠﺔ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﻁﻴﺔ ﺇﺫﺍ‪ ...‬ﺇﺫﻥ‪:‬‬

‫ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻒ ‪: Description‬‬ ‫ﻋﻨﺼﺮ ﻫﻴﻜﻠﻲ ﻳﺘﺴﺒﺐ ﺑﺘﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﻧﺺ ﺑﺮﻣﺠﻲ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﻁ ‪True‬‬ ‫‪ Syntax‬ﺍﻟﺼﻴﻐﺔ‪:‬‬ ‫ﻫﻨﺎﻙ ﺻﻴﻐﺘﻴﻦ ﻟﺠﻤﻠﺔ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﻁ ‪IF‬‬ ‫‪ .1‬ﺻﻴﻐﺔ ﺭﻗﻢ ‪: 1‬ﺻﻴﻐﺔ ﺍﻟﺴﻄﺮ ﺍﻟﻮﺍﺣﺪ‬ ‫}‪IF condition THEN action1 {ELSE action2‬‬ ‫‪Parameter‬‬ ‫‪Description‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺸﺮﻁ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺃﻥ ﺗﻔﺤﺼﻪ‬ ‫‪condition‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺤﺪﺙ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺃﻥ ﺗﻄﺒﻘﻪ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﻁ ﻧﺘﻴﺠﺘﻪ ‪True‬‬ ‫‪action1‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺤﺪﺙ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺃﻥ ﺗﻄﺒﻘﻪ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﻁ ﻧﺘﻴﺠﺘﻪ ‪False‬‬ ‫‪action2‬‬ ‫‪ .2‬ﺻﻴﻐﺔ ﺭﻗﻢ ‪ : 2‬ﺻﻴﻐﺔ ﺍﻷﺳﻄﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ‬ ‫‪Description‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺸﺮﻁ ﺍﻷﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺃﻥ ﺗﻔﺤﺼﻪ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺤﺪﺙ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺃﻥ ﺗﻄﺒﻘﻪ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﻁ‬ ‫ﺭﻗﻢ ‪ 1‬ﻧﺘﻴﺠﺘﻪ ‪True‬‬ ‫‪False‬ﺍﻟﺸﺮﻁ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺃﻥ ﺗﻔﺤﺼﻪ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ‬ ‫ﻧﺘﻴﺠﺔ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﻁ ﺭﻗﻢ ‪1‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺤﺪﺙ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺃﻥ ﺗﻄﺒﻘﻪ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﻁ‬ ‫ﺭﻗﻢ ‪ 2‬ﻧﺘﻴﺠﺘﻪ ‪True‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺤﺪﺙ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻘﻪ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻢ ﺗﻨﺘﺞ ﺃﺣﺪ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺸﺮﻭﻁ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺑﻘﺔ ‪.True‬‬

‫‪75‬‬

‫‪Parameter‬‬ ‫‪Condition1‬‬ ‫‪action1‬‬ ‫‪Condition2‬‬ ‫)ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭﻱ(‬

‫‪action2‬‬ ‫‪action3‬‬ ‫)ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭﻱ(‬

‫‪IF condition1 THEN‬‬ ‫‪action1‬‬ ‫‪{ ELSEIF condition2‬‬ ‫‪THEN‬‬ ‫‪action2‬‬ ‫}‪...‬‬ ‫‪{ ELSE‬‬ ‫} ‪action3‬‬ ‫‪END IF‬‬

‫ﺗﻌﻠﻢ‬


‫‪1‬‬


‫)‪IF Num = 1 THEN Open(w_first) ELSE Open(w_rest‬‬ ‫)ﺻﻴﻐﺔ ﺍﻟﺴﻄﺮ ﺍﻟﻮﺍﺣﺪ(‬

‫‪IF Num = 1 THEN‬‬ ‫)‪Open(w_first‬‬ ‫‪ELSE‬‬ ‫)‪Open(w_rest‬‬ ‫‪END IF‬‬

‫‪2‬‬

‫ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﺠﻤﻠﺔ ﺳﺘﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﻔﺘﺢ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ‪ w_first‬ﺇﺫﺍ‬ ‫ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ‪ Num = 1‬ﻭﺇﻻ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ‪w_rest‬‬ ‫ﻫﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺳﺘﻔﺘﺢ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻭﻫﻮ ﻧﻔﺲ ﺍﻟﻤﺜﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺑﻖ ﺭﻗﻢ ‪ 1‬ﻭﻟﻜﻦ ﺷﻜﻞ‬ ‫ﺻﻴﻐﺔ ﻣﺘﻌﺪﺩ ﺍﻷﺳﻄﺮ‪.‬‬

‫)ﺻﻴﻐﺔ ﻣﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ ﺍﻷﺳﻄﺮ(‬ ‫‪IF X=Y THEN‬‬ ‫)‪Beep(2‬‬ ‫‪ELSEIF X=Z THEN‬‬ ‫)‪Beep(5‬‬ ‫‪ELSEIF X=" " THEN‬‬ ‫)‪Beep(100‬‬ ‫‪ELSE‬‬ ‫)‪Beep(200‬‬ ‫‪END IF‬‬ ‫)ﺻﻴﻐﺔ ﻣﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ ﺍﻷﺳﻄﺮ(‬

‫‪3‬‬

‫ﻻﺣﻆ ﺗﺮﺍﻛﺐ ﺃﻛﺜﺮ ﻣﻦ ﺟﻤﻠﺔ ﺷﺮﻁﻴﺔ‬ ‫• ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺗﻨﻔﻴﺬ ﺟﻤﻠﺔ )‪ Beep(2‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﻁ‬ ‫‪ X=Y‬ﻧﺘﻴﺠﺘﻪ ‪.True‬‬ ‫• ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺗﻨﻔﻴﺬ ﺟﻤﻠﺔ )‪ Beep(5‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﻁ‬ ‫‪ X=Y‬ﻧﺘﻴﺠﺘﻪ ‪ False‬ﻭﻧﺘﻴﺠﺔ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﻁ ‪X=Z‬‬ ‫‪.True‬‬ ‫• ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺗﻨﻔﻴﺬ ﺟﻤﻠﺔ )‪ Beep(100‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺸﺮﻁ ‪ X=Y‬ﻧﺘﻴﺠﺘﻪ ‪ False‬ﻭﻧﺘﻴﺠﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺸﺮﻁ ‪ False X=Z‬ﻭﻧﺘﻴﺠﺔ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﻁ‬ ‫" "=‪.True X‬‬ ‫• ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺗﻨﻔﻴﺬ ﺟﻤﻠﺔ )‪ Beep(200‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ‬ ‫ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﻭﻁ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺑﻘﺔ ‪.False‬‬

‫‪ CHOOSE CASE PowerScript statement .2‬ﺟﻤﻠﺔ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ‪:‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻒ ‪: Description‬‬ ‫ﻋﻨﺼﺮ ﻫﻴﻜﻠﻲ ﻳﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺘﻮﺟﻴﻪ ﺗﻨﻔﻴﺬ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺑﻨﺎءﺍً ﻋﻠﻰ ﻓﺤﺺ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺒﻴﺮ ﻭﻋﺎﺩﺓً ﻳﻜﻮﻥ )ﻣﺘﻐﻴﺮ(‪.‬‬ ‫‪ Syntax‬ﺍﻟﺼﻴﻐﺔ‪:‬‬ ‫‪CHOOSE CASE‬‬ ‫‪Parameter‬‬ ‫‪Description‬‬ ‫‪CASE‬‬ ‫‪ testexpression‬‬ ‫ﻫﻮ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﺤﺪﺩ ﺃﻱ ‪ Script‬ﺳﻴﻨﻔﺬ‬ ‫‪testexpression‬‬ ‫‪ expressionlist‬‬ ‫ﺳﻴﻜﻮﻥ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ‪:‬‬ ‫‪expressionlist‬‬ ‫•‬

‫‪{ CASE‬‬ ‫‪ statementblock‬‬ ‫‪ expressionlist‬‬ ‫‪CASE‬‬ ‫ ‪ .‬‬ ‫‪. . statementblock‬‬ ‫‪ expressionlist‬‬ ‫‪CASE‬‬ ‫} ‪ statementblock‬‬ ‫ ‬ ‫ ‪statementblock‬‬ ‫‪} ELSE‬‬ ‫‪END CHOOSE‬‬

‫ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﻓﺮﺩﻳﺔ‬

‫• ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻢ ﻣﻔﺼﻠﺔ ﺑﻔﺎﺻﻠﺔ )‪(8 ،5 ،4 ،2‬‬ ‫• ﺻﻴﻐﺔ ‪.(1 To 5) To‬‬ ‫• ‪ Is‬ﻣﺘﺒﻮﻋﺔ ﺑﺄﺩﺍﺓ ﻋﻼﻗﺔ ﻭﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﻟﻠﻤﻘﺎﺭﻧﺔ )‪(Is>5‬‬ ‫• ﺃﻱ ﺗﻮﻟﻴﻒ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺼﻴﻎ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺑﻘﺔ )‪،9 ،7 ،5 ،3 ،1‬‬ ‫‪(TO 33, IS >42 27‬‬ ‫ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺠﻤﻞ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟـ ‪ PB‬ﺗﻨﻔﻴﺬﻫﺎ‬ ‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻭﺍﻓﻖ ﻓﺤﺺ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺒﻴﺮ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﻓﻲ ‪expressionlist‬‬

‫‪statementblock‬‬

‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‪:‬‬ ‫ﺳﺘﺠﺪ ﺗﺸﺎﺑﻪ ﻛﺒﻴﺮ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺟﻤﻠﺔ ‪ CHOOSE CASE‬ﻣﻊ ﺟﻤﻠﺔ ‪IF…THEN ELSEIF…THEN …END IF‬‬ ‫ﻣﻊ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﻼﻓﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﻧﻮﻳﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪76‬‬

‫ﺗﻌﻠﻢ‬



‫ﺟﻤﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺮﺍﺭ ‪:LOOP Statement‬‬ ‫‪ FOR...NEXT PowerScript statement .1‬ﺟﻤﻠﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺮﺍﺭ ﻣﻦ‪...‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪:‬‬

‫ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻒ ‪: Description‬‬ ‫ﻋﻨﺼﺮ ﻫﻴﻜﻠﻲ ﻳﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺘﻜﺮﺍﺭ ﺭﻗﻤﻲ ﻳﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻟﺘﻨﻔﻴﺬ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ ﺃﻭ ﺃﻛﺜﺮ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺠﻤﻞ ﻟﻌﺪﺩ ﻣﺤﺪﺩ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺍﺕ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ Syntax‬ﺍﻟﺼﻴﻐﺔ‪:‬‬ ‫‪FOR varname = start TO end‬‬ ‫‪Parameter‬‬ ‫‪Description‬‬ ‫ﺍﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻐﻴﺮ ﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺮﺍﺭ‪ ،‬ﺑﺈﻣﻜﺎﻧﻚ ﺗﻌﺮﻳﻒ ﺃﻱ ﻧﻮﻉ‬ ‫ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺭﻗﻤﻲ ‪:‬‬ ‫)‪(integer, double, real, long, decimal‬‬ ‫ﻭﻟﻜﻦ ﺇﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻧﻮﻉ ‪ Integer‬ﻳﺘﻴﺢ ﺃﺩﺍء ﺃﺳﺮﻉ‬ ‫ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﺪﺍﻳﺔ ﻟﻠﻤﺘﻐﻴﺮ ‪varname‬‬ ‫ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻨﻬﺎﻳﺔ ﻟﻠﻤﺘﻐﻴﺮ ‪varname‬‬ ‫ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺰﻳﺎﺩﺓ ﻳﺠﺐ ﺃﻥ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺛﺎﺑﺘﺔ ﻭﻣﻦ ﻧﻔﺲ ﻧﻮﻉ‬ ‫ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻐﻴﺮ ‪ ،varname‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﺇﺳﺘﺨﺪﻣﺖ‬ ‫‪ increment‬ﻳﺠﺐ ﻋﻠﻴﻚ ﺇﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ‪ +1 ،STEP‬ﻫﻲ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺰﻳﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻹﻋﺘﻴﺎﺩﻳﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺠﻤﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺗﻜﺮﺍﺭﻫﺎ‬

‫‪varname‬‬

‫}‪{STEP increment‬‬ ‫‪statementblock‬‬ ‫‪NEXT‬‬

‫‪start‬‬ ‫‪end‬‬ ‫‪increment‬‬

‫‪statementblock‬‬

‫‪ Usage‬ﺍﻹﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‪:‬‬ ‫ﺇﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ‪ start‬ﻭ ‪:end‬‬ ‫• ﻟﻠﺰﻳﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﺒﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﻳﺠﺐ ﺃﻥ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟـ ‪ end‬ﺃﻛﺒﺮ ﻣﻦ ‪ ،start‬ﻭﻟﻠﺰﻳﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﻟﺒﺔ ﻳﺠﺐ ﺃﻥ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ‪ end‬ﺃﻛﺒﺮ‬ ‫ﻣﻦ ‪.start‬‬ ‫• ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ‪ start‬ﻭ ‪ end‬ﺗﻌﺎﺑﻴﺮ ‪ ،Expression‬ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺇﺣﺘﺴﺎﺑﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﻛﻞ ﺗﻜﺮﺍﺭ‪ ،‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻢ ﺗﻌﺪﻳﻞ‬ ‫ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺒﻴﺮ ﺳﺘﺆﺛﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺮﺍﺭ‪ ،‬ﻭﺳﻨﻌﻄﻲ ﻣﺜﺎﻝ( ﺟﺴﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺮﺍﺭ ﻳﻐﻴﺮ ﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﺴﻄﻮﺭ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻐﻴﺮ‬ ‫ﻧﺘﻴﺠﺔ ﺩﺍﻟﺔ ‪.RowCount‬‬ ‫) (‪FOR n = 1 TO dw_1.RowCount‬‬ ‫)‪dw_1.DeleteRow(1‬‬ ‫‪NEXT‬‬ ‫‪ Nesting‬ﺗﺪﺍﺧﻞ‪:‬‬ ‫ﺑﺈﻣﻜﺎﻧﻚ ﻋﻤﻞ ﺗﺪﺍﺧﻞ ﺟﻤﻠﺔ ‪ ،FOR…NEXT‬ﻳﺠﺐ ﺃﻥ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ‪ NEXT‬ﻟﻜﻞ ‪.FOR‬‬ ‫ﺗﺴﺘﻄﻴﻊ ﺇﻧﻬﺎء ‪ FOR‬ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ‪ END FOR‬ﺑﺪﻻً ﻣﻦ ‪.NEXT‬‬ ‫‪ Avoid Over Flow‬ﻣﻨﻊ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻀﺎﻥ‪:‬‬ ‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ‪ Start‬ﺃﻭ ‪ end‬ﻛﺒﻴﺮﺓ ﺟﺪﺍً ﻋﻠﻰ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ‪ Varname ، Varname‬ﺳﻮﻑ ﺗﻔﻴﺾ ﻣﻤﺎ ﻳﺴﺒﺐ‬ ‫ﺗﻜﺮﺍﺭ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﻨﺘﻬﻲ ﻣﺜﺎﻝ‪:‬‬ ‫‪integer li_int‬‬ ‫‪FOR li_int = 1 TO 50000‬‬ ‫ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻨﻬﺎﻳﺔ ‪ 50000‬ﻛﺒﻴﺮﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ‪ ، integer‬ﻭﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻐﻴﺮ ﻳﺘﺰﺍﻳﺪ ‪ li_int‬ﺳﻴﺼﻞ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻢ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺴﻠﺒﻴﺔ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﻟﻠﻘﻴﻤﺔ ‪ 50000‬ﻭﺳﻴﺤﺼﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺮﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﻬﻲ‪.‬‬

‫‪77‬‬

‫ﺗﻌﻠﻢ‬



‫ﺃﻣﺜﻠﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺟﻤﻠﺔ ﺍﻟـ ‪:FOR…NEXT‬‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬

‫‪3‬‬

‫‪ FOR n = 5 to 25‬ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﺠﻤﻠﺔ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺈﺿﺎﻓﺔ ‪ 10‬ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ A‬ﻁﺎﻟﻤﺎ ‪ n‬ﺃﻛﺒﺮ ﺃﻭ ﻳﺴﺎﻭﻱ ‪ 5‬ﻭ ‪n‬‬ ‫‪A = A+10‬‬ ‫ﺃﻗﻞ ﺃﻭ ﺗﺴﺎﻭﻱ ‪.25‬‬

‫‪NEXT‬‬ ‫‪ FOR N = 5 TO 25 STEP 5‬ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﺠﻤﻠﺔ ﺗﻀﻴﻒ ‪ 10‬ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ A‬ﻭﺗﺰﻳﺪ ‪ N‬ﺑـ ‪ 5‬ﻁﺎﻟﻤﺎ ‪ N‬ﺃﻛﺒﺮ ﺃﻭ‬ ‫‪A = A+10‬‬ ‫ﺗﺴﺎﻭﻱ ‪ 5‬ﻭ ﺃﻗﻞ ﺃﻭ ﺗﺴﺎﻭﻱ ‪25‬‬ ‫‪NEXT‬‬

‫‪ FOR Count = 1 TO 100 STEP -1‬ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﺠﻤﻞ ﺗﺤﺘﻮﻱ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺳﻄﺮﻳﻦ ﻟﻦ ﺗﻨﻔﺬ ﻷﻥ ﺍﻟﺰﻳﺎﺩﺓ ﺳﺎﻟﺒﺔ ﻭﺍﻟـ‬ ‫‪IF Count < 1 THEN EXIT‬‬ ‫‪Start‬ﺃﻗﻞ ﻣﻦ ‪.end‬‬ ‫‪Box[Count] = 10‬‬ ‫‪NEXT‬‬

‫‪4‬‬

‫]‪ Int Matrix[100,50,200‬ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﺠﻤﻞ ﻣﺘﺪﺍﺧﻠﺔ‪ ،‬ﺗﻼﺣﻆ ﻋﺮﻓﻨﺎ ﻣﺼﻔﻮﻓﺔ ﺛﻼﺛﻴﺔ ﺍﻷﺑﻌﺎﺩ ﺛﻢ ﻗﻤﻨﺎ‬ ‫‪ FOR i = 1 to 100‬ﺑﺈﺳﻨﺎﺩ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ ‪ 1‬ﺇﻟﻰ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺣﻘﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﻔﻮﻓﺔ‪.‬‬

‫‪FOR j = 1 to 50‬‬ ‫‪FOR k = 1 to 200‬‬ ‫‪Matrix[i,j,k]=1‬‬ ‫‪NEXT‬‬ ‫‪NEXT‬‬ ‫‪NEXT‬‬

‫‪ DO...LOOP PowerScript statement .2‬ﺟﻤﻠﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺮﺍﺭ ﺍﻋﻤﻞ‪...‬ﻛﺮﺭ ‪:‬‬

‫‪1‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫‪3‬‬ ‫‪4‬‬

‫‪78‬‬

‫ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻒ ‪: Description‬‬ ‫ﻋﻨﺼﺮ ﻫﻴﻜﻠﻲ ﻳﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺘﻜﺮﺍﺭ ﺭﻗﻤﻲ ﻳﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻟﺘﻨﻔﻴﺬ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ ﺃﻭ ﺃﻛﺜﺮ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺠﻤﻞ ﻟﻌﺪﺩ ﻣﺤﺪﺩ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺍﺕ ﺑﻴﻨﻤﺎ ﺃﻭ ﺣﺘﻰ‬ ‫ﻳﺘﺤﻘﻖ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﻁ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻟﻬﺎ ﺃﺭﺑﻊ ﺃﺷﻜﺎﻝ‪:‬‬ ‫ﻳﻨﻔﺬ ﻛﺘﻠﺔ ﺟﻤﻞ ﺣﺘﻰ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﻁ ‪ ،True‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﻁ ﻣﻦ ﺃﻭﻝ ﺗﻜﺮﺍﺭ ‪ True‬ﻓﻠﻦ ﺗﺘﻨﻔﺬ‬ ‫‪DO UNTIL‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺠﻤﻞ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻳﻨﻔﺬ ﻛﺘﻠﺔ ﺟﻤﻞ ﺑﻴﻨﻤﺎ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﻁ ﻳﺴﺎﻭﻱ ‪ ،True‬ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺮﺍﺭ ﺳﻴﻨﺘﻬﻲ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﺼﺒﺢ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﻁ ‪،False‬‬ ‫‪DO WHILE‬‬ ‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﻁ ﻣﻦ ﺃﻭﻝ ﺗﻜﺮﺍﺭ ‪ False‬ﺍﻟﺠﻤﻞ ﻟﻦ ﺗﻨﻔﺬ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ LOOP UNTIL‬ﻳﻨﻔﺬ ﻛﺘﻠﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺠﻤﻞ ﻣﺮﺓ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻷﻗﻞ ﻭﻳﺴﺘﻤﺮ ﺣﺘﻰ ﻳﺼﺒﺢ‬ ‫‪ ، True‬ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻜﺮﺍﺭ‬ ‫ﻳﻨﻔﺬ ﻛﺘﻠﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺠﻤﻞ ﻣﺮﺓ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻷﻗﻞ ﻭﻳﺴﺘﻤﺮ ﺑﻴﻨﻤﺎ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﻁ ﻗﻴﻤﺘﻪ‬ ‫‪LOOP WHILE‬‬ ‫ﺳﻴﻨﺘﻬﻲ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﺼﺒﺢ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﻁ ‪.False‬‬

‫ ﻣﺤﻤﺪ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺮﻱ‬:‫ﺑﻘﻠﻢ‬

Power Builder 9.0

‫ﺗﻌﻠﻢ‬

:‫ ﺍﻟﺼﻴﻐﺔ‬Syntax DO UNTIL condition statementblock LOOP

Parameter Condition statementblock

Description ‫ﺍﻟﺸﺮﻁ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﻔﺤﺼﻪ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺠﻤﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺗﻜﺮﺍﺭﻫﺎ‬

DO WHILE condition statementblock LOOP DO statementblock LOOP UNTIL condition DO statementblock LOOP WHILE condition

:Do…Loop ‫ﺃﻣﺜﻠﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺟﻤﻞ‬ .15 ‫ ﺃﻛﺒﺮ ﻣﻦ‬A ‫ ﺣﺘﻰ ﺗﺼﺒﺢ‬Beep ‫ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺮﺍﺭ ﻳﻜﺮﺭ ﺩﺍﻟﺔ‬integer A = 1, B = 1

.15 ‫ ﺃﻗﻞ ﺃﻭ ﺗﺴﺎﻭﻱ‬A ‫ ﺑﻴﻨﻤﺎ‬Beep ‫ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺮﺍﺭ ﻳﻜﺮﺭ ﺩﺍﻟﺔ‬

A ‫ ﺃﻭﻻ ﺛﻢ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ ﺑﺘﻜﺮﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﻟﺔ ﺣﺘﻰ ﺗﺼﺒﺢ‬Beep ‫ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﺠﻤﻠﺔ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺘﻨﻔﻴﺬ ﺩﺍﻟﺔ‬ .15 ‫ﺃﻛﺒﺮ ﻣﻦ‬

‫ﺃﻗﻞ ﺃﻭ‬A ‫ ﺃﻭﻻ ﺛﻢ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ ﺑﺘﻜﺮﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﻟﺔ ﺑﻴﻨﻤﺎ‬Beep ‫ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﺠﻤﻠﺔ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺘﻨﻔﻴﺬ ﺩﺍﻟﺔ‬ .15 ‫ﺗﺴﺎﻭﻱ‬

DO UNTIL A > 15 Beep(A) A = (A + 1) * B LOOP integer A = 1, B = 1 DO WHILE A <= 15 Beep(A) A = (A + 1) * B LOOP integer A = 1, B = 1 DO Beep(A) A = (A + 1) * B LOOP UNTIL A > 15 integer A = 1, B = 1 DO Beep(A) A = (A + 1) * B LOOP WHILE A <= 15

1

2

3

4

79

Learn Power Builder 9

Recommend Documents